Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPK Contractors Inc; 2002-07-22; 3675-2 Part 9 of 10around. All unused space shall be covered by hinged blank doors and equipped to accept future units. Removable rear plates shall be sectionalized SO that it iS unnecessary to handle any plate larger than the section width or one-half the section height. A metal barrier extending the full height and depth of the section shall be provided to isolate each section from the next section as required. 2-2.02. ComDartmented Units. Each vertical section shall be constructed of modular components of various sizes. The modular components shall be designed to accommodate not more than six Size 1 or Size 2 full voltage combination motor starters per vertical section. Removable circuit breaker and motor starter units shall be provided with a mechanical interlock to prevent insertion or withdrawal when in the "on" position. Individual motor starter units, feeder breaker units, transformers, lighting panels, and control device compartments shall be isolated from each other by barriers of metal or a suitable insulating material. Each vertical section shall have a vertical-wiring trough for power and control wiring, and wiring troughs on top and bottom, which are continuous through the entire control center. Wire ties shall be provided in the vertical wireways unless the wireways are separated from the plug-in units by a permanent wall. 2-2.03. Wiring Labels and Terminal Blocks. All internal wires shall be labeled at each termination. Terminals shall also be identified with labels showing the terminal block and terminal number. All starter units shall be provided with unit control terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type rated 20 amperes. All current carrying parts shall be tin-plated. The removable portion of the terminal blocks shall be used for factory installed wiring. 2-2.04. m. The horizontal main bus and the vertical bus extensions shall be tin-plated copper mounted on supports formed of materials having high dielectric strength, low moisture absorbency, and high impact strength. The main bus shall extend the full length of the motor control center and shall have provisions for splicing additional sections onto either end. Both horizontal and vertical busing shall be braced against forces resulting from fault current. The vertical bus connecting an incoming power feeder cable shall have the same ampere rating as the main horizontal bus. Each vertical bus extension shall be rated 300 or 600 amperes as required. (Carlsbad Water) (Recycling Facility) 16480 -10- A tin-plated copper ground bus rated 300 amperes shall extend through the entire control center and shall be located where it will not interfere with pulling of external cable. Grounding connections shall be accessible from the front. The ground bus shall be provided with six 0.38 inch [lo mm] holes for each vertical section to accept ground lugs for any loads requiring a ground conductor. A solderless connector shall be provided on the ground bus in each end section for an external ground cable, sized from 110 AWG to 250 kcmil[50 to 120 rnm’]. Each vertical section shall have a vertical ground bus. The plug-in units shall engage the ground bus prior to engagement of the power stabs and shall disengage only after the power stabs are disconnected. 2-2.04.01. Neutral Bus. When required, a tin-plated copper neutral bus shall be provided through all vertical sections and shall be rated full capacity. 2-2.04.02. Neutral Pad. When required, the incoming line section shall be equipped with a neutral bond lug suitable to bond the service entrance neutral conductors. The service entrance neutral pad shall be equipped with a main bonding jumper to the control center ground bus in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 2-2.05. Isolation of Buses. The main bus shall be isolated from the horizontal wiring trough. The entire vertical bus assembly shall be enclosed within grounded steel or glass filled polyester barriers. The barriers shall have openings for power stabs of plug-in units. Shutters shall be provided to close the openings when units are removed. 2-2.06. Combination Maanetic Starters. When required, or as indicated on the drawings, control center starters shall be breaker combination, magnetic, reduced voltage, or across-the-line type as follows: a. Starters shall be 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with overloads, a 120 volt ac coil, a dry type control transformer, and a molded- case circuit breaker. Control transformers shall be mounted with the removable starters and shall have capacity for all simultaneous loads. Control transformers shall have both primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and one secondary lead grounded. b. Contactors shall be NEMA rated and have an 8 hour current rating in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Contactors of reversing or multispeed starters shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked. c. When required, spare interlock contacts, whether on the starter or (Carlsbad Water) (Recycling Facility) 16480 -1 1- a relay, shall be wired separately to the unit terminal board. d. When required, a 3 phase ambient-compensated bimetallic Style thermal overload relay with external manual reset shall be furnished with each starter. e. Not used f. Not used g. An external manual breaker operating handle with provisions for up to three padlocks shall be provided on each starter. The access door shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that the door cannot be opened, except by an interlock override, while the breaker is closed. h. CONTRACTOR shall match control transformers, overloads, heaters, and minimum sizes of starters to equipment furnished, which may differ from the estimated values indicated on the drawings. Overload relay elements shall be sized to reflect reduced motor current caused by load-side power factor correction capacitors. I. Unless otherwise specified, spare starters shall have breakers and overloads sized for the largest rated motor and 100 watts extra transformer capacity. 2-2.07. Combination Solid-state Starters. Not 2-2.08. Adjustable Freauency Drives. Not used 2-2.09.. Contactors. Contactors for control of bus voltage loads other than motors shall be the same as contactors for combination magnetic starters, except overloads will not be required. Mechanically held contactors shall have 120 volt ac coils with disconnecting contacts. Other contactors shall have 120 volt, continuous duty coils and contacts where indicated on the drawings. 2-2.10. Relavs and Timers. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have 120 volt, 60 Hz coils for continuous duty in 4OoC ambient, and 10 ampere, 120 volt ac contacts. Auxiliary relays shall be NEMA rated. 2-2.11. Control Switches and Pilot Liahts. Control switches and pilot lights shall be heavy-duty, oiltight construction, Pilot lights shall be transformer type with LED lamps. 2-2.12. Motor Protection Relay. Not used (Carlsbad Water) (Recycling Facility) 16480 -12- 2-2.13. Circuit Breakers. Control center disconnects shall be three pole, single- throw, 600 volt, molded-case air circuit breakers. Circuit breakers of combination starters shall be magnetic motor circuit protector type. Feeder circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type and shall be manually operated, with quick-make, quick-break, trip-free toggle mechanism. Bimetallic thermal elements shall withstand sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affecting calibration. Thermal elements shall trip the breaker at 125 percent of trip rating. The instantaneous elements of 225 ampere frame and larger breakers shall be adjustable and shall be set at 800% of trip rating. 2-2.14. Transient Voltaoe Suroe Suppression. Not 2-2.15. lncominq Line Meterins Compartment. Not used. 2-2.16. Miscellaneous. Other items indicated on the drawings shall conform to the applicable provisions of NEMA ICs 2 and UL 845. 2-2.17. Liohtino Transformers. Not used. 2-2.18. Panelboards. Not used. 2-2.19. Special Panels. Not used. 2-2.20. Shop Paintinq. All iron and steel surfaces, except stainless steel and machined surfaces, shall be plated or shop painted with the manufacturer's standard coating. Finish color for both indoor and outdoor equipment shall be ANSI 61. Field painting, other than touchup painting, will not be required. A sufficient quantity of additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished to permit field touchup of damaged coatings. When required, the underside of equipment to be installed in exposed outdoor locations shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with an automotive type undercoating material. The coating shall be thick enough to withstand normal handling during shipping and installation. The underside is defined as the . surfaces in contact with the floor or pad and other surfaces not readily accessible for field painting. The coating may be factory or field applied. 2-2.21. SDace Heaters. Not used. 2-3. ACCESSORIES. 2-3.01. Special Tools and Accessories. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special~tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices, (Carlsbad Water) (Recycling Facility) 16480 -1 3- 24. SHOP TESTS. The complete control center shall be tested at the factory. All circuits, including power and control, shall be given dielectric tests in accordance with NEMA ICs 2-322. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1, INSTALLATION. Installation will be in accordance with 16100 3-2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-2.01. Installation Check. When required, an experienced, competent, and authorised representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Section 01650, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of ENGINEER. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certrfying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting conduit or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily, All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price for the number of days and round trips to the site as required. 3-2.02. Field Installation SuDervision. Not used, End of Section (Carlsbad Wafer) (Recycling Facility) 16480 -14- CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT San Diego County California CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, STATE WATER RESOURCES CONTROL BOARD BOILERPLATE, SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS, AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CARLSBAD WATER RECYCLING FACILITY VOLUME 3 OF 3 CONTRACT NO. 36752 February, 2002 CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT San Diego County California CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, STATE WATER RESOURCES CONTROL BOARD BOILERPLATE, SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS, AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CARLSBAD WATER RECYCLING FACILITY VOLUME 3 OF 3 CONTRACT NO. 36752 February, 2002 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 3 OF 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - OPERATIONS, ELECTRICAL, AND CANOPY STRUCTURES Division Section Title Division 01 General Requirements 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01421 Roofing Inspection Services 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01 730 Operations and Maintenance Data 01 900 Seismic Bracing and Anchoring Division - 02 Sitework 0201 0 021 50 Subsurface Investigation Shores 02220 Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting 02280 Soil Treatment 02521 Architectural Concrete Paving 02830 Chain Link Fences 02835 Electrical Gate Operators, Gates, and Ornamental fencing Division 04 Masonry 04200 Concrete Masonry Division 05 Metals 05120 Structural Steel Division Of i Wood and Plastics I Carpentry .aminated Beams Plastic Laminate xtural Woodwork TOC i of iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Division Section Title 0741 0 Preformed Metal Roofing 07530 Membrane Roof 07600 Flashing and Shee 07920 Sealants and Calking ." ~ ~ ~~~~~~~ ~ .. ~ ~ Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 071 10 Membrane Waterproofing 0721 0 Buildina Insulation l t Metal ing and Waterproofing I Division 08 Doors and Windows 08110 Metal Doors and Frames 08122 Aluminum Door and Window Frames 0821 3 Plastic Faced Wood Doors 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 0841 0 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing Division 09 Finishes 09200 Lath and plaster 09260 Gypsum Wallboard System 09310 Ceramic Tile 0951 0 Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpeting 09972 Plastic Coated Wall Panels 09900 Painting Division 10 Specialties 10120 Tackboards 10165 Laminated Plastic Toilet Partitions 10400 Identifying Devices 10501 Wardrobe Lockers 10520 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10800 Toilet Room Accessories Division I1 Equipment 11132 Projection Screens Division 12 Furnishings 12620 Furniture TOC ii of iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Division Section Title Division 13 Special Construction Not Used Division 14 Conveying Systems Not Used Division 15 Mechanical 15300 Automatic Fire Sprinkler System 15400 Plumbing General Provisions 15405 Plumbing 15450 Plumbing Equipment 15460 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15800 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning TOC iii of iii Division 01 General Requirements SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section describes tesrmg and inspecting to he provided hy the Contractor, plus cu~~perat~on requlrd from the Contractor with the Owner's selected testing agency and others responsihle for resting and Inspecting the Work. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. Requirements for testing may he described in various Sections of these Specifications. 3. Where no testing requirements are described. hut the Owner decides that resting is required, the Owner may require such testing to he performed under current pertinent standards for testing. Payment for such testing will he made as descrihed in this Section. C. Work not included: 1. Selection of testing laboratory: The Owner will select a prequalified independem testing lahoratory. 2. Selection of construction soil engineer: The Owner will select a prequalified independent soil engineer to observe performance of work in connection with excavating, trenching. fihg hackiihg, and grading, and to perform compaction tests. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The testing laboratory will he qualified ro the Owner's approval in accordance with ASTM E329. B. Testing, when required, will he in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, and with selected standards of the Amerlcdn Society for Testing and Materiak. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614 B. Promptly prncess and disrrihute required copies of test reports and related instructions to assure necessary retesting and replacement of materials with the last w~ssihle delay in progress of the Work. PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 PAYMENT FOR TESTING A. Initial services of testing lahoratory: 2. Whin Initial tests indicate non-complrance with the Contract Lkxluments, the COS~S of all test5 1. The Owner will pay for initial servlces requested hy the Owner. associdted with that non-compliance will he deducted hy the Owner &om the Contract Sum. B. lnitlal services of construction soil engmeer: 1. The Owner will pay for initial servlces requested hy the Owner including, hut not necessarily limited to, observing performance of work in connection with excavating, trenching, filling, hackfilling, and TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ~ CMWD 01410-1 grading. deduct from the Contract Sum the costs for compactton tests performed to provide comphmce wlth codes of ordlnances. 2. ne Owner pay for compacrlon rests performed hy the construction soil engineer. hur will C. Reresting: When inlrlal tests Indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent retesting occasioned hy the non-complrance shall he performed hy the same restlng agency. and costs thereof will be deducted hy the Owner from the Contract Sum. 2.2 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING A. Inspections and tests requlred hy codes or ordinances, or hy a plan approval authority. and which are made by a legally constituted authority, shall he the responsihihty of and shall he pad tor by the Contractor, unless othewlse provided in the Contract Documents. 2.3 CONTPdCTOR'S CONVENIENCE TESTING A. Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall he the sole responsibility of the Contractor. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY A. Representatives of the testing lahoratory shall have access to the Work at all times and at all locations where the Work is in progress. Provide facilities for such access to enable the lahoratory to perti~rm its functions properly. 3.2 TAKING SPECIMENS A. All specimens and samples for testing. unless otherwise provided in the Conrract Documents, shall he taken hy the testing personnel. All sampling equipment and personnel will he provided hy the resting laboratory. All deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing lahoratory will he performed by the testing lahoratory. 3.3 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING A. Gtahllshmg schedule: 1. By advance discussion with the testing lahoratory selected hy the Owner, determine the time 2. Provide all requd tlme with the construction schedule. required for the lahnratory tu perform its tests and to issue each of its findings. B. Revising schedule: When changes of c~nsr~ct~on schedule are necessary during construction. coordinate all such changes with the testmg \ahorarmy as required. C. Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the esrahlished schedule, hut IS prevented from testmg or taking specimens due to Incompleteness of the Work. all extra charges for testlng attrlhutahle to the delay may he hackcharged to the Contractor and shall not he home hy the Owner. END OF SECTION TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES I CMWD 01410-2 SECTION 01421 WATERPROOFING INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provlde independent inspection for waterprwiing and rooftng as described in this Sectlon B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to. General 2. Sectinn 07530 - Single Ply Rooiing System. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Secure the Owner's Representative's advance approval of date and time for substrata inspections and pre- installation meetings. 1. Notify the waterproofing inspectinn service, the waterproofing and roofing suhcontractors, and 2. At least three calendar days prior to the meetings, notify the Owner's Representative of the names other interested partles, and secure their agreement to attend. of persons expected to attend. C. Records: 1. Maintain a complete and legible file, in chronologlcal order, containing a copy of each report, 2. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver a copy of the complete file to the Owner's certificate. and other communication received relative to the work of this Section. Representative. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOFING INSPECTION SERVICES A. For the work of this Sectlon. retain the waterproofing inspection services of one of the follnwing. 2. National Roofing Consulrants, lnc.,118 Lincoln Avenue, Pomona, CA 91767 (909) 620-0177; 1. Van Dijke and Associates. 28 Hammond, Su~te 'G', Irvine, CA 92618 (949) 586-3828; 3. Orchard roofing CGlnsulrants. 600 South Grand Avenue, Suite 101, Sanra Ana, CA 92705 (714) 835-4672. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 COORDlNATlON A. Coordinate as necessary wlth other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work ofthose trades for interface with the work of this Section. 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS WATERPROOFING INSPECTION SERVICES. CMWD 01421-1 A. Not jess than three nor more than ten calendar days prior to scheduled starr of Installation. conduct a suhstrata lnspectlon and pre-installation meeting at the job slte. 1. ne meeting for waterproohng and iw roofing may he conducted simultaneously or at diKerent 2. Except as otherwise dlrected hy the Owner's Representative. the Owner's Representative will he tunes, as determlned hy the Owner's Representatlve. chairperson of the meeting. will take minutes of the meeting, and will record all ameements reached as a result of the inspection and meeting. a. Determlne general acceptahility, and determine areas requmng further preparation. h. Determine acceptahle remedies ior unacceprahle area. and finish of Installation of the mstallations. 3. Vlsually inspect all substrata upon which waterproofing and/or rnoflni: are scheduled [<I he applied. 3. Discuss proposed schedule for installatlon of the materials. and reach agreement as to dates of start 4. Discuss proposed methods for mtallation, ad equipment and personnel 10 he used. 5. Discuss inspection methods to he used, reports to he issued by the inspector. responsihilities and limits of responsihilities of the inspector. and potential problems arising from use of methods not agreed to in the pre-installation meetings. 3.3 INSPECTION DURING INSTALLATION A. Verify that materials delivered to the joh site are those approved hy the Owner's Representatlve for use on this Work. B. Visually observe installation including, hut not necessarily limited to: 1. Check kettle temperatures, and verify that bitumens are not heated beyond temperatures recommended by the manufacturer of the approved materials. 2. At least three times daily, check temperatures of bitumens as delivered to the suhstrdte. and verify that temperatures of bitumens are within the range recommended hy the manuiacturer of the approved materials. 3. Verify use of installation procedures agreed upon in the pre-installation meeting. 4. Call attention of the subcontractor's representatwe on the joh to unacceptable methods and unacceprahle results. C. When so directed hy the Owner's Representative, make one tesr cut each day. prior ro application of final surfacing. 1. Except as otherwise approved hy the Owner's Representative, make the test cuts 300 mm (12") 2. By precise weighing of identical 300 mm (12") square pieces of memhrane. determine the amount of 3. Verify that the suhcontractnr provides proper patching of areas where test cuts were made. 4. Include with the dally report a statement of weights (and corresponding adequacy or Inadequacy of square and through all layers that are then in place. hitumens applied in the 300 mm (12") square sample. materials) at test cuts. D. Make final visual inspectinn of the entire installatlon. 1. Cnmpile a list nf items required to he revised or replaced. 2. Uehver a copy of the list to thr suhcontrdclor's representative nn the joh, and to others as 3. Verlfy proper revision or replacement of all Items on the list. apprnprlate. 3.4 REPORTS A. Make daily written reports of Inspectinn actwltres, delivering copies r~ suhcontractors and others as aped In the pre-installation meetlng. B. Upon completion of the installation, compile a comprehensive report coverlng activitles performed under thls Section. and deliver a copy of the report to the: 1. Owner's Representative; WATERPROOFING INSPECTION SERVICES. CMWD 01421-2 2. Owner; 3. Subcontractors; and 4. Others as agreed in the pre-instdl.~rrcm meetings 3.5 LIMITS OF INSPECTORS RESPONSIBILITIES A. During installation, the rnspecror is required tcl: 1. Make visual ohservamms and cc~mp~le reports descrihed In this Sectton; 2. Advise the suhconnacrm reprrscnratlves on thr ]oh as to unacceptahk methods and unasceptdhk results when so ohscrvcd hy thc tnspector. B. In connection with the insrallarlon. "undccrptah~e methods and unacceptable result," mran methods and results other than: 2. Those required by pertment regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdlction. 1. Those recommended hy the manuidcrurer of the approved materials. 3. Those required by these Specificatr~ms; and 4. Those agreed to in the pre-installarwn meetings. C. The inspector is not empowered tu: 1. Act for, or in lieu of, representatives ofthe governmental agencies having jurisdiction; 2. Give directions to the Contractor. suhcuntractor. or workmen on the joh; 3. Revise any part of rhe Contract Ikruments; or 4. Approve any change In the methods agreed upon in the pre-installation meetings. D. Failure of the inspector tc) ohserve unacceptable methods or unacceptable results during pruprss ofthe Work will not ahsolve the Contractor from responsihilrty to complete thr Work In accordance with the specified requirements and rhe agreed methods. ENL) OF SECTION WATERPROOFING INSPECTION SERVICE - CMWD 01421-3 SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OF'TlONS AND SUBSTITUTlONS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Sectton describes product optlons availahle to hidders'and the Contractor. plus procedures fur securing approval of proposed suhstitutlons. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Make submittals m accordance with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. The Contract is based on standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. In agreeing to the terms and conditions of the Contract, the Contractor has accepted a responsibility to verify that the specified products will he availahle and to place orders for all 2. Neither the Owner nor the Owner's Representatwe has aFeed to the suhstitution of materials or required materials in such a timely manner as is needed to meet his agreed construction schedule. methods called for in the Contract Documents, except as they may specifically otherwise state in writing. B. Materials and/or methods specified hy name: 1. Where materials and/or methods are specified by naming one single manufacturer and/or model numher, without stating that equal producs will he considered, only the material and/or methnd named is approved for incorporation into the Work. material or method was ordered in a timely manner and will not he availahle in time fnr on proposed substitute materials and/or methods as are needed to help the Owner's Representative incorporation into this Work. the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representarlve such data determine suitability of the propnsed suhsttturion. 2. Should the Contractor demonstrate to the approval of the Owner's Representative that a specified C. Where materials and/or methods are specified hy name and/or model numher, followed hy the words "or an equal approved In advance by the Owner's Representative": 1. The material andim method specified hy name establishes the requlred standard of quallty; 2. Materials and/or methods proposed hy the Cmtractor to he usrd in heu of materials and/or methods so specified by name shall in all ways equal or exceed the quahties of the named mater& and/or methds; hid. 3. Proposed suhstlturions shall he descrihed on attached form suhmitted at time of General Contract D. The following products do not require further approval except for interface within the Work: 1. Products specifled hy reference tn standard specifications such as ASTM and similar standards; 2. Products specified hy manu6dcturer;s name and catalof: model numher. E. Where the phrase "or equal," or "or equal as approved hy the Owner's Representative," occurs In the Contract Documents. do not assume that the materials. equipment. or methods will he approved as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Owner's Representative. PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS - CMWD 01630-1 F. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall he final. 1.3 RElMBURSEMENT OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES COSTS A. In the event suhstitutions are proposrd to the Owner's Representative after the Contract has hcen awarded, the Owner's Representative will record all time used hy the Owner's Represenrdrive and the Owner's Representative's consultants in evaluating each such proposed substitution. B. Whether or not the Owner's Representative approves a proposed suhsritution, the Contractor promptly upon receipt of the Owner's Representatwe's hilling shall reimhurse the Owner's Represenratwe at rhc rate of two and one-half tlmes the direct cost to the Owner's Representatwe and the Owner's Representdtlve's consultants for all tme spent hy them in evaluating the proposed suhstltution. 1.4 DELAYS A. Delays in construction arismg by virtue of the non-availability of a specified material andlor method will Completion. not he considered by the Owner's Representative as justifying an extension of the agreed Time of END OF SECTION PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. CMWD 01630-2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Number # sheer I of 2 TO: Owner WITH A COPY TO: Gillls and Assocrate Architects PROJECT: CMWD Reclaimed Water Facility Operations Building 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Specified item: Specifications Section: Page: Para./Line: Specified Item: - Reposed Substitution (Brief Description): CompJereproducr descrbrion, drawinp, pboroppbA; pedonnancr and rrsr dam andurbrr inhnnaricm necessaryhr evahrion IS arracbed What differences exist between the proposed substitution and the specified item with reason for not giving priority! (Explain as an attachment) Does the proposed substitution affect drawings dimensions changes or redesign of structure or MEPWork: Yes- No- Will changes be required in the building design in order to properly install the proposed substitution? If "yes" explain on attachment Yes- No- 1f"yes" explain on attachment as other modify parts of the Work required Will the undersigned pay for all changes to the building design, including engineering and drawing costs, tu make all parts of Work complete and functioning. caused by the proposed substitution including all Architect and/or Architect's Consultant fees for substitution and at no additional cost to Owner. Yes __ No - additional studies, investigations, submittal reviews, redesign and/or analysis caused by the requested What adverse effect does the propaed substitution have on other trades? (Explam as an attachment) Does the manufacturer's warranty on the proposed substitution differ from that specified? Yes- No- If "yes" explaln on attachment Will the proposed substitution affect the construction progress schedule? Yes- No- If"yes" explain on attachment the days ofadJ/deduct Will maintenance and service parts be locally available for the proposed substitution? Yes- No- 1f"yes" explain on atrdchment where and type of services change: Proposed total change in contract sum including changes in the work necessary to accommodate this 1f"yes" explain on attachmenr Proposed Change to the contract sum: (Explain as an attachment of an Add/Deduct amount) parr of'wuesr Tor subsrirurion andhas complereiv fi1kd-m rhls Zpape ibrm. Conmctor wifl naive fhre claims Tor aub"carr ro Consmcrion Conmcr causpdb,"~ub~rlrur~on. Conrracrorcemfies char rhepmpedsubsnrur;on 1s of qualpedonnance andasumes rhe ~~bi~NTo~ec~. Conmror ha3 hvesrgaredrhepropared subsrirurion and beheves char ir k qual ro or mprh al/repcrs ro sp..&direm, and wiIIcon~m ro a//appfikYe cWes andregularionn.. des@ requkmenrs andarrkic effecr. Upn submirrJM chis Requerr Tor Subsrimrion, rhe unders&nedcerrAes rhar rhe Tollowi~p~phs are comr, unless orhrrrvrVe mm'dedon amchmenrs. Cbnmcror has comp/ied wirh reqwiemenrs ofGmera/andSpcb/ Condrions and Conmcr kumenrs as PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS - CMWD 01630-3 CT FQRM N&r # sheet 2 of 2 - ~~ Submitted by: Signature: Address: Firm: Telephone: Date: Failure tn provide legally binding signature Shall result in retraction of Approval For Use By Architect: -Approved -Approved as Noted (Correct & Resuhmlt for Record) -Revise and Resubmit -Rejected Reviewed only for conformance with Desip Concept of Documents the Project and with information given in Contract Signature: Date: For Use By Architect's Consultant: Date: Date: Signature: Signature: For Use by Owner: ATTACHMENTS AIIMusr& Pmvidedhr &ch &ipinaISpc&flrem andPmposedSubscicure kern /The Archicecr may require addcional ihmacion/.. 1. specification section and Contract Documents: Attached Product Data for Specified Item: Clearly marked to indicate full compliance with 1. comparison with data submitted for specified item: Attached - Product Data for Substitution: Clearly marked for adequate evaluation and 3. Samples: Attached 4. Cost Data Comparison Specifying Product Cost and InstallationjLahor Cost and 5. Conrractnr's Comments: Attached 6. Manufacturer's certification on asbestos, PCB, UL Rating and ICBO Number. lmpllcatlons of Substitution: Attached Attached Attached 7. Manufacturer's Certification on Prnduct Warantee and/or Maintenance Promms a. Other PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. CMWD 01630-4 SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provlslons of Sectlon 01300 B. Suhmit two copies of a prellmlnary draft cd the proposed Manual or Manuals tn thr Owner's Representative for revieu, And comments. C. Unless otherwise directed In orher Secr~ms. or In wrltlng hy the Owner's Representative, suhmir three copies of the final Manual rt) the Owner's Representatlve prior to indoctrination of operatron and maintenance personnel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In preparing data requlred hy this Sectmn. USK only perxmnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and mamtenancc 01 thc Jcscrihed Item>. c<mplctely iamihr with the requirements of this Section. and skilled In tcchnlcal wrltlne t(~ the exrenr ncclled for communicating the essential data. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL5 A. Where instruction Manualr Arc rqulred ro he suhmitted unller other Sectmns of these Specificatwns. prepare in accordance wrrh the pnwlsrc>ns of thra Srctwn. B. Fnrmat: 1. Size: 2. Paper: 4. Drawings: 3. Text: Ncarlv wrlrten or prlnred ZI~1n1nx2i5mrn(H.1/2"~11") Whlrc. hond, at lrasr 9 ke (20 Ih) wrlpht 275 rnm (I 1") in hwhr preterahle; hlnd in with texr; fnldout acceptahle; IarCcr drawlngs acceptahle hut fold ro fit within the Manual and provide a JrawlnC pocket inside rrar cover or hind in with text. 5. Flysheets: Serarare each pnrtlon of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets hrlefly 6. Binding: descrlhlng contents of the ensulng portion; flysheets may he in color. Use hravy-duty plastlc or fiherhmrd covers with binding mechanlsm OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA - CMWD 01730-1 concealed inside the Manual; 3-ring hinders will he acceptable; all binding IS subject ro the Owner's Representative's approval. 7. Measurements: and cfm; where items may he expected to he measured withln ten yrars In Provide all measurements m U.S. Standard unm such as teet-and-inches. Ihs, accordance with merric formulae, provide addltional measuremenrs In the "International System of Unlts" (SI). C. Provlde front and hack covers for each Manual, using durable material approved hy the Owner's Representatlve, and clearly identihed on or through the cover with at least the followmng lntmnmon: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ( (-) ) ( ) (-) ( ) ( (- ) ) (m ( space for signature of ) val dare ) D. Contents: Include at leasr the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location 2. Complete instructions regarding operarion and maintenance of all equipment involved including 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of the equipment. 4. Complere nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturers' bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating the precise within the Manual of all emergency information reEdrding the installation. lubrication, disassemhly, and reassembly. vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. items included in this installation and deleting. or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required In pertinent other Sections of these Specifications. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Preliminary: 1. Prepare a prehminary draft of each proposed Manual. 2. Show general arraneement, nature of contents In each portion, prohahle number of drawings and 3. Secure the Owner's Representatwe's approval prm ro proceeding. thelr size, and proposed method of hlndlng and covering. B. Final: Complete the Manuals in strict accordance wlrh the approved prelimnary drafts and rhe Owner's Represenrarive's review comments. C. Revislons: 1. Following rhe indoctrination and insrrucrlon of operarion and maintenance personnel. review all 2. If the Conrractor is required by the Owner's Representative to revise previously approved Manuals. proposed revisions of the Manual with the Owner's Representative. compensation will he made as provided for under "Changes" in the General Conditions. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ~ CMWD 01730-2 SECTION 01900 SEISMIC BRACING AND ANCHORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provlde hracing and anchoring for all cahlnets, casework, wall-hung and ceiling-hung equipment and specialties, floor-supported and floor-attached equlpment. conveying systems. mechanical equlpment. elecmcal equlpment. and all other non-portable items essentlal to operation and use of the iacillty Including items furnished by the Contractor and items furnished hy the Owner hut installed hy the Contractor. 8. For Owner-Furnished-Connactor-Installed items, the Ownet will furnish such additional information as is required by the Contractor for preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations. 1.2 SUBMIITALS A. Where design of bracing and anchoring is completely shown on the Drawings, no submittal is required. B. Where design of hracing and anchoring is not completely shown on the Drawings, and for equipment and/or items shown as "deferred," prepare and submit the following in accordance with the approved Contract Schedule: 1. Shop Drawings clearly defining the proposed method for hracing and anchoring the pertinent item 2. Calculations, prepared, signed, and stamped hy a registered civil or structural englneer, employed or items, and interface of the hracing and anchoring with adlacent materials; and paid hy the Contractor. supporting the proposed bracing and anchoring design and demonstrating its adequacy. C. Secure the Owner's Representative's approval and approval of all governmental agencies having jurisdictlon prior to fabrication and installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Sectlon. B. In addition to compiylng with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies havlng jurisdicr~~n, hrdce and anchor to resist horizontal forces acting In any drectlon usmg the following criteria: 1. Light fixtures IO@% of weight; 2. Flxed equipment 50% of operating weight; 3. Emergency power and communicatam 75% ofoperatinl: weight; 4. Flexibly-mounted equlpment Use two times the ahove values; 5. Slmulraneous vertical force Use 1/3 times the horizontal force. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide materials, equipment, labor. and all other items as needed to comply with requirements of the SEISMIC BRACING AND ANCHORING - CMWD 01900-1 governmental agencies having jurisdiction PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and condlrions under which work of thls Section will he petiormed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatlsfdctory condlrions are corrected. 3.2 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Fahrlcate and install bracing and anchorlng in accordance with the approved design and all other requirements of the Contract. END OF SECTION SEISMIC BRACING AND ANCHORING ~ CMWD 01900-2 Division 02 Site Work SECTION 02010 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section describes soils investigatlon at the s~te, and use ofdata resulting from that ~nvest~ear~on. 1.2 SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT A. General: 1, A soils investigation report has heen prepared for the site of this Work hy the soil investigation 2. The soils investigation report is included as an appendices to the Construction Manual. engineer selected by the Owner (Kleinfelder Inc, ]oh Number 51-594701, dated 12 Sep 01). B. Use of data: 1. This report was obtained only for the Owner's Representative's use in design and is not a part of the 3. Bidders should visit the site and acquaint themselves with existing conditlons. 2. The report is available for bidders' information, hut is not a warranty of subsurface cond~t~nns. 4. Prior to bidding, hiddea may make their own subsurface investigations to sat& themselves as to Conrract Documents. site and suhsurface conditions. hut such investigations may he performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A construction soil engineer will he retained by the Owner to ohserve performance of wnrk in connection with excavating, trenching, filling, hackfilling, and grading, and to perform compaction tests. B. Readjust work performed that does not meet technical or design requirements, hut make nc deviation from the Contract Documents without specific and written approval from the Owner's Representatwe END OF SECTION SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION. CMWD 02010-1 SECTION 02150 SHORES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. As specified in this Section, provide shoring at excavatlons and elsewhere as requlred to protect workmen, materials. other properties. and the public. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General 2. As established in the General Conditions of the Conrract. the Contractor is solely responsible for Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. means and methods of construction and for the sequences and procedures to he used. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Prior to submitting shoring design for approval of governmental agencies having junsdicrion. suhmn the design to the Owner's Representative for review. 1. The Owner's Representative's review will he for space coordination purposes only, and will not 2. Should changes in the shoring dewgn he required suhsequent to the Owner's Representative's relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract. review, coordinate all such changes wlth the Owner's Representative and secure the Owner's Representative's approval of changes in space allocatlons. C. Upon completion of construction of this prtion of the Work, submit to the Owner's Representative two copies of a letter signed by the approved shoring design engineer srating that. to the hest of the shoring design engineer's knowledge. the shoring system was constructed In accordance with the arrangement reviewed by the Owner's Representatwe. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skillell workmen thoroughly trained and exvrienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed fnr proper performance of the work of this Secrmn. B. Employ a qualified engineer. properly permitted to provide such services at the location of the Work, to design the shoring system and ro inspect and report on the quality of its construction. C. Comply with pertinent requlremenrs of governmental agencies havlng jurisdiction. D. Coordinate the shoring design and construction with: 1. soil investigation report prepared for this Work; 2. Structural system established for the Work, including location of columns, pilasters, walls, and nrher features. PART 2 . PRODUCTS SHORES. CMWD 02150-1 2.1 DESIGN A. Design a shorlng system which will safely and adequately prevent collapse oi adlacent materrals and which w~ll permit construction of the Work to the arrangement shown on the Drawings. B. Secure all needed approvals. lncludmg those of governmental agencies havmg Jurisdiction anJ of adjacent property owners if required, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide materials of all kinds as required for execution ofthe approved shorlng system. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Construct and install the shoring system in strict accordance with the design approved hy the governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and in srrict accordance with the space arrangement approved hy the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION SHORES. CMWD 02150-2 PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Excavate, backfill, compacr, and grade the sire ro the elevations shown on thr Drawings, as specliied herein, and as needed to meet the requlrements of the construction shown in the Contract hcuments. B. Related work 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include. hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 02010 - Suhsurfdce Investigation. 3. Section 03000 - Cast-In-place concrete. Conditions, Supplemenvary Cnndn~ms. and Sections in Dlvision I of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers nf skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requlrements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use equipment adequate In sue. capacity, and numhers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. C. In addition to complyux wlth requiremrnrs of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. comply with the directions of the snil cnglneer. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. Comply with pertlnent pn>vIwm.* uf Section 01614. PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill and hackfill marerlak 1. Provide soil matrrlals tree inm orpnic mmer and delererinus substances, concaning no rocks or lumps over 150 mm (6") In grraresr dlmenslcm. and with nor more than 15% oithe rock. or lumps Larger than 6@ mm (2-3/x') In their greatest d1mmsnr. excavations 111 Imprrrd inlm nft.slre bomw areas, prrclominantly panular, non-expanswe soils free from rmts and orher dulcrcrl~rus matter. or emhmkmenr. Provide sand free from <lrxmlc materral and other flmlkn matter. and as approved hy the soil engineer. requirements of Sectwn 03000 of thesr Specif~cati(~ns. 2. Fill materral IS suh~ecr ro rhc approval c1t rhe x111 englnerr. and IS that material removed from 3. Dc not permit nicks harm2 a dlmenswn greater than 25 mm (1") in the upper 300 mm (12") offill 4. Cohesionless marerlal used tor structural hackfill: 5. Where granular has? I.* callrJ for under huildmg slahs, provide aggregate complying with EXCAVATING. BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ~ CMWD 02220-1 2.2 WEED KILLER A. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical compound. soluble in water, capable of inhihlting F(lwrth of vegetation. and apprnved for use on this Work by governmental aEencies having junsdiction. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Where and if shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil conslstinl: c,ffriahk, fertile soil of loamy character, contalnlng an amount of organic matter normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably free from subsoil, rmts, heavy or stiff clay, stnnes larger than 50 mm (2") in greatest dimension. noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter. and other deleterious matter. B. Obtaln topsoil from sources wlthin the project limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained frnm sources outside the pro~ect limits, or from hoth sources. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials. not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation. as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. Comply with pertinent provisions of these Contract Documents 3.3 PROCEDURES A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to he removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior tn excavating. If damaged. repair or replace at no addltlonal cost tn the Owner. to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that servlce is not intempted. repalring the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner. Section. immediately notihi the Owner's Representative and secure his instructions. the Owner's Representative. 2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known 3. If service IS lnterrupted as a result of wnrk under thls Section, immediately restore service by 4. If existing utilitles are found to interfere wlth the permanent facilities being constructed under this 5. Dn nor proceed with permanent relocarlon of utilltles until written instruct~ons are received from B. Protection of persons and property: 1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as parr of the Work. and post wamlng lights on 2. Operate warning lights durlng hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. 3. Protect structures, utihles, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilitles from damage caused hy property adjacent to or with public access. settlement, lateral movement, washout. and other hazards created by operations under this Section C. Dewatering: EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ~ CMWD 02220-2 D. E. 3.4 EX( A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1. Remove all water. including rain water, encountered during nench and suh-srmcture work fo an 2. Keep excavations and slte construction area free from water. use means necessary to prevent dust hecomlng a nuisance to the puhlic. to neighbors, and tc1 orher work heing performed on or near the site. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times. approved location hy pumps, drains, and other approved methods. ZAVATING grades, and elevations Indicated and specified herein. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits of thr Work to the Imes, Satisfactory excavated materials: 1. Transpnrt to, and place in, fill or embankment areas within the limits of the Work. Unsatisfactory excavated material: 1. Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by the soil engineer, and replace with satisfactory 2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory material. and replacement by satisfactory materials, as parts of materials. the work of this Section. Surplus materials: 1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated material. and surplus satisfactory excavated material, away from the site at disposal areas arranged and paid for by the Contractor. Excavation of rock: 1. Where rocks, houlders. granite, or similar material is encountered, and where such material cannnt he removed or excavated by conventlonal earth movlng or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the general gradmg operations of the Work, and remove or excavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nnr endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site. 2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Owner's Representative. Excavate and hackfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. BOiTow: 1. Obtain material required for fill or emhankment in excess of that produced within the grading limits nf the Work from horrow areas selected and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the soil engineer. Ditches and gutten: 1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades. and elevations shown. 2. Maintain excavatlons free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and other debrls until 3. Dispose of excavated materrals as shnwn on the Drawings or directed by the soil engineer; except do completion of the Work. not, in any case, deposit materrals less than 1 m (3'0) from the edge of a ditch. Uneuthorized excavation: 1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subpde elevations or dimensions without specific lnstrucrion from the Owner's Representatlve or the soil engineer. 2. Under footings. foundations, or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavations hy extending the indicated hottom elevation of the footing or h. When acceptable to the soil engineer, lean concrete fill may be used to bring the hottom hase to the excavation bottom, without altering the required top elevation. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING . CMWD 02220-3 3. Elsewhere, baskfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorned excavations. elevation to proper position. unless orhenvise directed by the soil engineer. J. Stability of excavations: 1. Slope sides of excavations to 1:l or flatter. unless otherwise directed hy the soil enpmeer. 2. Shore and brace where sloping is nor possihle hecause of space restrictions or stahihty of the 3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of hackfilling. materials being excavated. K. Shoring and bracing: 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as may be necessary for safety of personnel, protection of 2. Malnraln shormg and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will hr open. 3. Cany shoring and bracing down as excavation progresses. work, and compliance with requlrements of governmental agencies having jurisdictlon. L. Excavating fm structures: 1, Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 20 mm (0.10 fr), and extending formwork, installation of services, other construction required, and for inspection. a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removing concrete a. Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed. b. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. complete. M. Excavating for pavements: 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation: 3. Excavate for footings and foundations only after general site excavating, filling, and Fading are 1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sections, elevations, and grades. N. Cold weather protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 2 degrees C (35 degrees F). 3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. General: 1. For each classification listed below, place acceptable soil material in layrn to required subgrade 2. In excavations: elevarlons. 3. Under asphalt pavements: a. Use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 4. Under building slabs: a. Use subbase materials. a. Use panular fill. if so called for on the Drawings, complying with aggregate acceptable under Section 03300 of these Specifications. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as proLress of the Work permits, but not until completion ofthe following. 1. Acceptance of construction below finish Fade including, where appkable, dampproofing and 2. Inspectmg, testing, approving. and recordmg locations of underground utilities. 4. Removing shormg and bracing. and hackfilllng of voids with satisfactory materials. 3. Removing concrete fonnwmk. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Placement of horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. waterproufmg. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, ANDCOMPACTING ~ CMWD 02220-4 C. Ground surface preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions. and deleterious matter from 2. plow, stnp, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal so that fill 3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "compacting" for the ground surface prlor to placement oi fills. material will hand with existing surface. particular area, break up the ground sufiace. pulverize. molsturecondition tn the optimum mwsture content, and compact to requlred depth and percentage of maximum denslty. D. Placing and compacting: 1. Place backfill and fill materlals in layers not more than 200 mm (8) in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, molsren or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optlmum mnisturc 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for area. 4. Do not place hackfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly 7. Where the construction includes basement or other underground walls having structural floors over content. around the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift. them, do not hackfill such walls until the structural floors are in place and have attained sufficient strength to support the walls. 3.6 GRADING A. General: 1. Uniformly grade the area within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition 2. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerance. 3. Cornpact with uniform levels or slopes between pnints where elevations are shown on the Drawings. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition section having a or between such points and existing grades. minimum radius of approximately 2.4 m (8'-0). unless adjacent construction will nnt permit such a transition, or if such a transltion defeats positive control of drainage. areas. B. Grading outside huilding lines: 1. Grade areas adlacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent 2. Finish the surfaces to he free from irregular surface changes, and: ponding. a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 20 mm (0.10 it) above or helow the required subgrade b. Shape the surface nfareas scheduled to he under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, elevation. elevation, with finished surface not more than 10 mm (0.05 ft) above or below the required subgrade 3.7 COMPACTING A. Control soil compactlon during construction tn provlde the mlnlmum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to ASTM D1557. B. Provide not less than the followmg maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material In place, and as approved by the soil engineer. 1. Structures: a. Compact the top 200 mm (8) of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 2. Lawn and unpaved areas: 90% of maximum denslty. EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING - CMWD 02220-5 a. Compact the top 200 mm (8") of suhgrade and each layer of fill material or hackfill material at b. Compact the upper 300 mm (l?") of filled areas, nr natural soils exposed by excavating. at YO% of maximum denslrs. 85% of maximum denstry. 3. Walks: a. Compact the top 200 mm (8") of suhprdde and each layer of fill material or backfill materrdl at 90% of maximum denslty. 4. Pavements: a. Compact the top 200 mm (8) of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at YO% of maximum density. C. Moisture control: 1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must he moisture-condltloned hefore cnmpactinC, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearlnp on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the 3. Sod material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may he stockpiled or specified density. spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until molsture cnntent soil engineer. is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined hy moisture-density relation tests approved by the 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Secure the soil engineer's inspection and approval of suhgrades and fill layers before subsequent construction IS permitted thereon. B. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the soil engineer: 1. At paved areas, at least one field density test for every 188 sq m (2000 sq ft) of paved area. but nor 2. In each compacted fill layer, one field density test for every 188 y m (2000 sq ft) of overlaying less than three tests; paved area, hut not less than three tests. C. If, in the soil engineer's opinion hased on reports of the testing laboratory, subgrade or fills which have heen placed are below specified denslty, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Section 01410 of these Specifications. 3.9 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of newly graded areas: 2. Repalr and reesrahlish wades ~n settled, ended. and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free from trash and weeds; 8. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by suhsequent cnnstructlon operations or adverse weather. scarify the surface, reshape, and CnmpdCC to the requlred density prior to further construction. 3.10 CERTIFICATION A. Upon completion of thls porta~n of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver tn the Owner's Representative a written report from the soil engineer certifying that the compaction requirements have heen ohtalned. State in the report the area of fill or emhankrnent, the compaction density obtained, and the type or classiflcarion offill materrdl placed. END OF SECTION EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING . CMWD 02220-6 5ECTION 022% WlL TREATMENT PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. To inhihit the mfestatlon ot termites m w~d constructmn, adequately poison the soil as drscrihed herem and as needed for a complerr and proper msrallarlon. B. Related work 1. Documents affecring work ofrhls Section include. hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplemenrary Condltlons. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificarlons. 1.2 SUBMliTALS A. Comply with pertinent prnve~ons of Section 01300 B. Proofs of compliance: 1. Prior to start of this portion of the Work, suhmlt to the Owner's Representative all evidence required by him to prove the qual~ficarions of the applicator and to prove compliance with the requirements for materds as speclfied. copies ofthe requlrrd warranty to the Owner's Representative. 2. Upon completion ofrhls portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance. deliver three 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers otskilled workmen thoroughly rralned and experienced in the necessary crafts and complerely familiar with rhc specifled requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Qualifications ofappllcmr: 1. Unless otherwtse spectflcally approved hy the Owner's Representative, use an applicator who has heen successfully enraCuJ In the hushes5 11fscd powning in Southern California for a perlod of not less than one year lmmedlarrly prior to performlng thls pation ofrhe Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with perrinenr pnwlslunh nf Secrion 01614. B. Do not apply soil psnn when rhr soil is excesswely wer or there IS an immediate likelihood of rain. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty in form acceprahle to the Owner's Representative. drawn in favor of the Owner and his successor and asslps. 8. Provisions required: Specifications; years after the dare 11frreatment; 1. All soil poisonlnx has heen prrfMIned In accordance with requirements of this Section of these 2. The effectiveness ofthe soil treatment agalnsr termlrr infestation will continue for not less than five SOIL TREATMENT. CMWD 02280-1 3. All evidence of reinfestation wlthin the warranty period will he treated promptly in accordance with 4. Complete performance of the warranty is assured hy Surety acceprahle to the Owner. C. In accordance with all terms of the warranty, treat all evidence of termite reinfestation whlch is rhls Sectlon of these Specifications and at no additional cost to the Owner; dlscovered within the warranty period. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 CHEMICALS AND CONCENTRATIONS A. To the soil areas to he treated. apply one of the following chemicals at not less than the designated concentranon. 1. Aldrin: 2. Dieldrin: 0.5% applied in water emulsion; 3. Heptachlor: 0.5% applied in water emulsion. 1.0% applied in water emulsion; B. Other materials may he used provided they are acceptable to the Owner’s Representative and provided they have met a five year test conducted hy the U. S. Forest Service. In all cases of proposed suhstitution provide conclusive evidence that material proposed to he used will have no toxic effect on humans or heneficial plant and animal life. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions denimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Under concrete slahs on grade: 1. Apply soil poison uniformly to all areas where concrete slah on grade is indicated on the Drawings. a. On top of base under the slahs, apply at a rate of not less than 5.6 liten (1-1/2 gallons) per h. Along both side of foundation walls. along interior foundations, and around plumhing, apply at three square meters (10 square feet); a rate of not less than 15 liters (4 Kailons) per 3 hedl m (10 lineal feet). B. Elsewhere, apply soil poisoning uniformly under sidewalks and all other paved areas within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the building, at a rate of nor less than 3.7 liters (one eallon) per three square meter (10 square feet). 3.3 PROTECTION OF TREATED SURFACES A. Unless the treated surfaces are to he covered immediately. take all means necessary to prevent disturhance of the treated areas hy human or anlmal contact. END OF SECTION SOlL TREATMENT - CMWD 02280-2 SECTION 02521 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 ~ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide archltectural concrete paving and finishes as indicated on the Landscape Drawings, furnish and install necessary materials, labor, equipment and services specified herin and needed tk a complete and proper installation.. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limlted tn. General 2. Section 07920 - Sealants and calking. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Pnreed, suhmit: C. Shop drawings: 2. Paving jointing and pour sequence plan - suhmit plans indicating the following: 1. Suhmit shop drawings for reinforcing steel and accessories in accordance with ACI standards. a. Proposed layout of contracnon, construction and isolation joints. Clearly delineate the three h. Layout of paving types as indicated on drawing paving schedule. Give overall dimensions of c. Indicate sequence of paving pour installation on concrete pour sequence drawing. D. Statement of mix design: Submit (1) copy of Statemen of Mix Design prepared hy hatch plant servicing the Work for each load delivered tn the project. Statement of Mix &sign to contain the following information: 2. Date nf mix design. 1. Name, address and telephone numher of hatch plant preparing statement of mix design. 3. Project location. 4. Contractor requesting load delivery. 6. Intepl colors used. 5. Mix design numher. 7. Gradations for sand and aggregate. 8. Materrdl weights. specific gravlty and absolute vchmes. 9. Basis of testing. 1@. Waterlcement ration. 11. PSI ratmg. 12. SiLmature of testing laboratory manager. 13. Slgned and stamped from registered pnqrct structural en&' meer. different jolnt types. each paving type. E. Provide extra stock surface seeded aggregate: 1. One (1) pound sample of each aggregate specified. 2. One (100) pound sealed hag of each aggregate specified for use by Owner in future repairs of damaged architectural concrete paving. ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING- CMWD 02521-1 F. Provide extra stock washed concrete sand: 1. One (50) pound sealed hag of washed concrete sand similar to type used during installation of architectural concrete paving. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessay Crafts and work.of this Section. completely famihar wlth the specified requirements and methods needed tor pruper performance oithc B. Quality control to he maintained by licensed msrallers approved hy the manufacturer thruughour the duratlon of the project. C. For each finish specified use aggregate from same source for each paving type D. Mock-ups 1. Prior to consrmction. provide ( 1 ) 4'-O"x4"O"x4" sample of each paving type specified on the drawings. 2. Each mock-up is to contain sample of joints specified on the drawings. 3. Locate mock-ups in a conveniently accessible and protected place. Approved mock-ups will he hasis 4. Remove mock-ups from site upon completion of work and approval of Owner's Representative. on which completed work will be reviewed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 SURFACE SEEDED AGGREGATE A. Provide surface seeded aggregate as provided hy Lithocrete. l(858) 558.1800, in types. sizes, colors and dtsrrihution percentages or equal of other manufacturer's when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Type I. IA. 11. HA. 111. IIIA, IV and V cements, conform to ASTM C150. B. Use same hrand of cement from single source throughout entre project C. Refer to drdwings for cement type specified. 2.3 WASHED CONCRETE SAND A. Clean, hard and durable washed concrete sand confmn~ng to ASTM C33. B. Use same sand from single source throughout prqect 2.4 COURSED AGGREGATE A. Clean, hard and durahle course aggregate conforming to ASTM C33. B. Use same aggregate from single source throughour entire project. ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING- CMWD 02521-2 2.5 WATER A. Free from deleterious materials such as oils. acids and organic matter. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. lntepl concrete coloring admixture: Refer to Landscape drawings for color type. Acceptdhk manufacturers are: 1. L.M. Scofield; (800) 800.9900; 2. Colo*ull hy Admlxtures. Inc; (26) 357.3263; 3. w, (800) 453.8213. B. Air enrrainment admixtures conforming to ASTM C260. Acceptable manufacturers are: 2. Master Builders, Inc.: Mlcro-Air (800) 628.9990; 1. Grace Construction Products: Daravair (800) 433.0020; 3. Other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative. C. Water reducing admixtures conforming to ASTM C494 type A. Acceptable manufacturers are: 2. Master Builders, Inc: Micro-Air (800) 628.9990; 1. Grace Construction Products: WRDA (800) 433.0020; 3. Other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative. D. Shrinkage reducing admixtures conforming to ASTM C157. Acceptable manufacturers are: 2. Other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner’s Representatwe. 1. Grace Construction Products: Echpse (800) 433.0020; 2.7 READY MIXED CONCRETE A. Batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.8 REINFORCING A. Reinforang steel to conform to ASTM A615 and he clean and free of rust. dirt, grease or oils, B. Tie Wire: 16 Fauge plain cold-drawn sreel conforming to ASTM A82, clean and free of rust, dirt. grease or oils. C. Supports for reinforcement: 1. Provide supwltts for reinforcement includins holsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing hars In place. D. Polypropylene fiber reinforcements: 100% virgin multifilament polypropylene fibers complying with ASTM C 11 16 - Type 111. Application rate ro hc 1/2lh. /cy of mix. Acceptable manuiacturers are: 1. Fibermesh Fihrmix Stealth - %” long; (423) 892.8080; 2. Grace Construcrion Products: Mlcro flher (800) 433.0020; 3. Other manufacturers when approved In advance hy the Owner’s Representatwe. 2.9 ISOLATION JOINT MATERIALS A. Refer to section 07920 - Sealants and calking, 2.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINT DOWELS A. W diameter rebar. free of dirt, grease and oils. Encase 50% of each dowel in a speed dowel plastic sleeve to allow parallel lateral movement of each dowel. Speed dowel to he provided by Greenstreak at (800) ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING- CMWD 02521-3 325,9504 or equal when approved in advance hy Owner's Representative. 2.11 FLYASH A. ASTM C616 - type F. 2.12 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper insrallation. as selected by the Contractor suh~ect to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 , EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Minimum 4" layer of graded washed concrete sand compacted to 95% relarwe compaction is placed over suhgrade prior to placing concrete. Subgrade to meet requirements of soil's investigation report. C. Screed sand to a smooth plane, D. Utilities and inigarion lines are to he buried and compacted helow bottom of sand layer. E. Keep sand damp prior to placing concrete. 3.2 FORMING A. Contractor to he responsihle for design and engineering of form work as well as its construction. Work 10 conform to recommended pracrlce for concrete form work (ACI 347). latest edition. B. a1 not exceed ZO'x20' in a formed constructlnn area C. Form lumher is to he new a2 or better LTade wond. Llr not use used form lumher. D. Pedorm form layout with a digital electronic transit fnr Line layout accuracy. E. Alhw fnrms to remain In place lnng ennu~h to allow concrete tn set properly. Remove forms when appIl>pIldte. 3.3 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTlONlNG A. Proporrlon and mix of cement. agkwpre. admlxture and water to attain required plasrlcity and strength Concrete Mlxrures.' In accnrdance wlth currenr edltlun of ACI Manual ~dConcrete Practlce and PCA 'Design and Contrnl nf B. Cnncrete mlxturrs to he designed hy an appnwed cnmmercral testing laboratory, using approved marerrdk to ohrain specified mlnimum compresslve strength. C. Concrete mlx criteria: 1. Slump: 5" with a %" slump differenrlal between successihe hatches. Ohtain approval from Owner's 2. Minimum PSI raring at 28 days: 2,500. Representatlve if slump IS outside these parameters. ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING- CMWD 02521-4 3. Cement quantity per yard of mlx: a. Minunurn: 6 sack. 4. Waterlcement ratio: 0.65-0.6;. h. Maxlmum: 7 sack. 5. Sand: 70% oftoral mlx. 6. Pea gravel: 30Yu oftoral mix. 7. Admixtures: a. Alr entralnmenr: Do not exceed 2%. h. Shrinkage reduclnr: not exceed 296 hy welght of cement. 8. Non-chloride accelerators: Do ncn use cornmve accelerators such as calcium chluride. 9. Concrete delivery: Use nf concrerc Itvads excredlng 90 minutes from time nf hatch planr must he approved hy the Owner'b Reprearnratlve. Batch planr to guarantee that slngle source IS used tor cement, sand and agererate for enure project. 3.4 JOINTING A. Refer to ACI 302 'Guide to Concrete Floor and Slah Construction' for work under this section B. Construction and contracting joints: 1. Sawcut construction and conmactlon Joints in locations indicated on drawings. 3. joint width: Per drawings - do not exceed 3/16" in width. 2. Perform jointing with a new diamond tip circular saw. 4. Depth of sawcuts: 1/4Ih depth of dah. Decorative SdWCUtS to he as shown on drdwinp. 5. Sawcut jolnts in a stralght line wlth no overcutting. 6. Use a hand tool to sawcut up tn vertlcal edges such as walk, steps, curbs and columns. No cutting into vertical surfaces wdl he allowed. C. Isolation joint calking: 1. install isolation jolnr calking as specitled under section 07920 - sealants and calking. 3.5 CURING A. After initial Lithocrete aegrerate exposure, c<mtinunrusly sprinkle or fog paving with water fnr minlmum 7 days. 3.6 SEALING A. Seal or surfdce of pavlnx usln:: Llrhtwere SVdler <>therb approved in advance by the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVING- CMWD 02521-5 SECTION 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES PART 1 ~ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide color coated chain link fence system around entire perimeter or site and where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B.. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limned to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Nonce tn Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; Representative, will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3QUALlTY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhen of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply wlth pertinent provisions of Sectmn 01614. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1CHAIN LINK FENCESYSTEM A. Where indicated on the Drawings prnvide Ameristar, 1555 N. MinEo Road, Tulsa, OK 321.8724. HT-40 indusmal weight framework. fahrlc and other necessary items require, proper installation. Provide equal systems from other manufacturers when approved in Owner's Representative. CHAIN LINK FENCES. CMWD 02830-1 74116, (800) d for a complete and advance hy the 2.2OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut requlred for a complete and proper installation. as selected hy the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representatwe. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct cnndltam detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Dn not proceed until unsatisfdctor). conditinns are corrected. 3.2INSTALLATION A. General: 2. Install comer or slope posts where changes in line or grade exceed a 30 degree deflection. 1. Install posts at a maximum spacing of 3 m (lO'-0") on centers. B. Excavating: 1. Drill holes for post fmtings in firm, undisturhed 01 compacted soil, strictly adhering to the dimensions 2. Post hole dimensions: and spacing shown. a. Provide .75 m (30") deep by 200 mm (8") diameter foundations for line posts for 1.5 m (60") fahrlc h. Provide 1 m (36") deep hy 200 mm (8") diameter foundations for line posts for fabric heights c. Provide 1 m (36) deep by 300 mm (12") diameter foundations for all other posts. directed. and at least 450 mm (18") for end, pull, gate. and comer posts. Drill hole at least 25 mm (1") greater drameter than the largest dimension of the post to he placed. exceed minlmum depths specified ahve. m (36 depth). height and less. exceeding 1.5 m (60). 3. Spread soil from excavations uniformly adjacent to the fence line, or on adjacent areas of the site if so 4. #en solid rock is encountered near the surface, drill into rock at least 300 mm (12") for line posts 5. If solid rock is helow soil overburden. drill to full depth required, except penetration into rock need not 6. Excavating will not he required if the Owner's Representative approves mechanically driving posts to 1 C. Setting posts: concrete 1. Remove loose and fnreikm materials from sides and httoms of holes, and moisten soil prior to placing 2. Center and allgn pms in holes. 4. Check each post for vertical and top alipment. and hold in pnsition durlng placement and finishlng 3. Place concrete around posts In a continuous pur. and vihrdte or tamp for consolidation. 5. Trowel tops of footings, and slope or dome tn dlrect water away from posts. 6. Extend footings for rate posts to the underside nf hottom hlnge. 7. Set keeps, stops, sleeves, and other accessories into concrete as requlred. 8. Keep exposed concrete surfaces moist for at least seven days after placement, or cure with memhrane operations. curing material or other curing method approved hy the Owner's Representative; grout-in those posts which are set Into sleeved holes, concrete constructions, or rock excavations, using nonshrink CHAIN LINK FENCES. CMWD 02830.2 portland cement put or other purlng materral approved by the Owner's Representative. 9. An acceptable alternative method fnr settlnp posts wlll he mechanically drlving to a depth of 1 m (36"). D. Concrete strength: 1. Allow concrete to attaln at kdSt 75% of Its minimum 28-day strength hetnre rails. tension wires. and/or 3. Do not stretch and tension fahrlc and wlre, and do not hang gates, until concrete has attalned its full 2. Do not, in any case, install such items in less than seven days after placement of cnncrete. fabric 1s installed. design strength. E. Rails and bracing: 1. Install fence with a top rail and bottom tension wire. 2. Install top rails continuously through post caps or extension am, hending to radus for curved runs. 4. Provide bracing to the midpoint of the nearest line post or posts at all end, corner, slope. pull, and gate 3. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by the fencing manufacturer. 5. Install tension wires parallel to the line of fabric by weaving through the fabric, and tying to each post posts. with not less than number 6 gage galvanized wire, or by securing the wire to the fabric. F. Installing fabric: 1. Leave approximately 50 mm (2") between finish grade and bottom selvage. 2. Excavate high points in the ground to clear the bottom of the fence. 3. Place and compact fill to within 25 mm (1") ofthe bottom of the fabric in depressions. 4. Pull fabric taut and tle to posts, rails, and tension wires. 5. Install fabric on outward side facing side of fence, and anchor to framework so that the fabric remains 6. Install stretcher bars by threading through or clamping to fabric on 100 mm (4") centers, and secure to in tenslon after pulling force is removed. posts with metal bands spaced 380 mm (15") on centers. G. Installing gates: 1. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. 2. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage in accordance with the fence manufacturer's 3. Lubricate and adjust the hardware for smooth operation. recommendations as approved by the her's Representative. H. Miscellaneous: 1. Use U-shaped tie wires, confnrming to diameter of pipe tn which attached, clasping pipe and fahric 1. Bend ends nf wlrr tn mlnlmlze hazards to persons and clothing. 3. Fasteners: firmly with ends twisted at last two full turns. a. Install nuts for tenslon hand and hardware hnlrs on side of fence opposite fabric side. 4. Repair coatlngs damaged In the shop or field erection. using a hot-applied repalr compound applied in h. Peen the ends of halts to prevent removal of nuts. accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION CHAIN LINK FENCES ~ CMWD 02830-3 PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide electric gate operators, rates and ornamental fencing where shown on the Drawrngs, as specitird herein, and as needed for a cclmplete and proper msrallatlon. B. Related work: Documents affecting work of this Secricm Include. hut are not necessarily limited to. General Conditions. Supplementary Conrlrtions, and Secttons in Divisron 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Sectron 01300 B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of items pnyosed tcl he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifrcatinns and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings in suffrcrent detail to show fahrcation, installation. anchorage, and interface ofthe 4. Manufacturer's recommmded installatton procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; work of this Secticln wrth the work td adjacent trades; Representative, will hecome the hasra for acceptrnc or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers ofsktlled wclrkmen thorouchly trarned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with rhc specriled requ~remenrs and methods needed for proper performance ofthe work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent pnrvlw)n.r {If Section 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC GATE OPERATORS A. Bi-parting pres: 1. Gate operator rrr he A hvdraulrc slide Care operator as manufactured hy HY-Security, 1200 West Nickerson Street, Searrlc. WA 98119, l(800) 321-9947. Model to he HRG 222 ES or equal when approved in advance hv the Owner's Repreaentdtlve. C)Perator system to include all components and accessories tu provtde a complerc and operatrond\ system including all controls to allow for an opening and closrnc tmr <If 1.2 feet per second. a key card (or fob) access and radio control with all safety features that are available for the particular mde. The gate is to he equipped with a 'free-exit' feature. ELECTRIC GATE OPERATORS. GATES AND ORNAMENTAL FENCING. CMWD 02835-1 2. Sire and configuration to he as shown on the drawings. 3. Gate operator to he equipped with a cahiner lock cnver. 4. The engineerlng of the structure of the gate will he the respnnsihihty of the gate manuiacturer 2.2 ORNAMENTAL FENCING AND GATES A. Fencing and gates to he wrought iron as manufactured hy Builders Fence Company inc.. 13111 l)ahilta Street. Fontana, CA l(800) 767-0367. Style to he 'Heavy Regal' or equal when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. Flnish to he Galva-Guard I in colors selected by Owner's Representative and applied at the factory. Touch up paint tn he supplied by manufacturer and to match cnlnr selected hy Owner's Representatwe. 1. Top rail: 1 %"x1 %I" 14 eauge steel tuhe. 2. Pickets: %"x%" 16 gauge steel tuhe at 4 %" o.c. 3. Posts: Z"x2" 14 gauge steel tube with pressed steel cap. Space posts maximum 1@'-0" (LC. B. Sliding gates to be equipped with 2 %" mesh full height of gates 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation. as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in accordance with pertinent requirements of all governmental agencies havlng jurisdlction and with the Shop Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations as approved hy the Owner's Representative. B. Put the completed installation through not less than ten complete operating cycles, and adjust as required to achleve optimum smcwthness and efficiency of operation. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Gate operators: 1. Provide manufacturer's five-year warranty against all defects in materids nr workmanship except hatteries. Which are to hr covered on a five-year prnrated warranty. Defective materials will he replaced wlth new material fumlshed hy the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner. 2. Tram Owner's personnel In the general maintenance of the gate operator and accessnries and provide one copy of'Operations and Maintenance' manual for the Owner's use. A second manual will be available to Owner at no extra charge to the Owner. Manuals will identify parts of the equipment for future prncurement. END OF SECTION ELECTRIC GATE OPERATORS, GATES AND ORNAMENTAL FENCING - CMWD 02835-2 Division 03 Concrete SECTION 03000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRm PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide cast-in-place concrete where shc>wn on the lhwinps, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation dudlng hut not llmlted to formwork. shoring. hrdcing, anCh[lrdge. reinforcement and accessories. B. Related work: 1. Documents affectm): work of thu Section include. hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Condltlons, and Sectlons in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Specified cement and amewes shall he frcn smgle sources only 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE ANDHANDLlNG A. Comply with pertinent pr<lvl'icm of Section 01614. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildmcs. 8. ASTM A185 , WeldeJ Srecl Wlrr Fabrlc for Concrere Relninrcement. C. ASTM A615 ~ Deformell and I'laln Rillet-Steel ior Consrere Rrmforcement. D. ASTM A706. L~w-Alh~w Srecl Lkiormed Bara tnr Cc,ncrere Reinforcement E. ASTM C33 . Concrete AgJmCarc5. F. ASTM 04. Ready-Mlxrd Gmcretc. G. ASTM C150. Portland Cemenr H. ASTM C171 . Sheet Marmat, ior Curlng Gmcrrru I. ASTM '309 - Liquid Memhrmc Forming ccrmpclunds for Curing Concrete. 1. Chapter 19, UBC. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT5 A. Conform to Chapter 19, UBC CONCRETE ~ CMWD 0300(, .I 1.7 TESTS A. Testing and analysis ofconcrete will he performed under provisions of Section 01410. Testing hhordton Services. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Conform to Section 1906, UBC. B. Plpvood Forms: Dough F1r species: solid one side sound undamaged sheets. C. Lumher: Douglas Fir species; construction grade with grade stamp clearly visible D. Form Ties: Removable metal of adjustable length, cone ends 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615,60 ksi yield grade billet steel deformed hars for No. 5 hars or larger, 40 ksi yield grade for No. 4 bars and smaller. Welded hars shall he ASTM A706,60 ksi yield grade. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185; in flat sheets. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: UBC. ASTM C150. Type 1, normal or Type 11, moderate, portland Type, conforming to Section 1903.2, B. Aggregates: 1. Aggregates for Stone Concrete: ASTM C33 C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl Acetate; HIBOND, manufxtured hy Lamhert Corporation,Orlando, FL, LOCK BOND NO. 906, manufactured hy MacklanBurg-hncan Co., City of Industry, CA. or equal. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Clean and drinkahle. B. Curmg Compound: ASTM C309, clear with red fugitlve dye RES-X ALL RESIN BASE No. 302 manufactured hy the Burke GI., San Maten, CA, or equal for use on exterinr flatwork only. C. Polyethylene Film:ASTM C171,4 mil thick. clear rwlyethylene film, single sheet. manufactured from virgin resin with no scrape or additlves, free of visible defects, uniform in appearance. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance Section 1905, UBC and 1905.3, UBC. 1. Design Mix: Method "B by an approved Testing Laboratory, certified by a registered professional engineer licensed in California. CONCRETE - CMWD 03W ~ 2 2. nor exceed 0.48 water-cement ratio, hy weight. B. Select proportions for concrete in accordance with the approved design mix. 2. Grout MIX: 1:3:2 portland cement to pea gravel, to sand, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days. 1. Requned Strengh As scheduled. C. Provide concrete to the followmg criteria: Min 28 day Max Max Size Element Strengh Slump Aggregate TvDe Foundations 3,000 4-inch 1-1/2-inch Reg. Slabs 3,000 4-inch 1-112-inch Reg. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Verify lines, levels and measurement before proceeding with formwork. B. Hand trim sides and hottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt. .C. Erect formwork, shoring and hracing to achieve design requiremenrs, in accordance with requirements of Section 1906, UBC. D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. E. Arrange and assemble formwork to prmit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during srr~pping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. F. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. G. Ohtam approval hefore framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on hawings H. Provide chamfer strips on external comers. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect staff, persnnnel and public &om harm and accident during formwork. Conform to California Code of Regulations. Title 8, Sukhapter 4, Gmstruction Safety Orders, 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement apainst displacement. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete hy cleaning with sandhlasting to remnve laitance and expose clean aggregate. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert 10 inch long No. 3 steel dowels at 18 inches O.C. and pack solid with non-shrink grout. CONCRETE. CMWD 03ooO. 3 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with Section 1905, UBC. Remove loose dirt from excavations B. Notify Owner's Representative minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. All excavations, {om and remforcing shall he inspected and approved hy the Owner's Representatlve prior to placement. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parrs and accessories are not disturbed dunnl: concrete placement. D. When detailed on the drawings, separate slahs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick jomt filler. E. Extend joint filler from bottom of slah to within 1/2 inch of fimshed slab surface using one-component polyurethane sealant as specified in Section 07920. F. Place concrete continuously hetween predetermined expansion, control and consrruction joints G. Do not interrupt successive placement: do not permit cold joints to occur. H. Avoid segregation of material. Perform tamping and vibrating so as to produce a dense, smcnth application free of rock pckets and voids. Do not use vibrators to move concrete horizontally I. Provide special mix prepared by the Testing Laboratory and approved by the Owner's Representatlve utilizing smaller aggregates in areas of reinforcing congestion to prevent the formation of rock pockets. J. Do not allow concrete to fall free from any height which will cause material to segregate. Maximum height of free fall permitted in any case: 5 feet. Utilize trunks 01 additional chutes where doubt occurs. K. Construction Joints: Wash surface of each joint shortly after pouring to expose clean, sound awegate. Sandblast surface to remove laitance remaining or loose aggregate as approved hy the Owner's Representative. Conform to Section 1906, UBC. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's msmctions. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Provide fanned concrete surfaces to he left exposed with smooth tuhhed finish B. Provide smmth rrowel finish at flat surfaces. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately aker placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury. B. Maintain cnncrete with minimal moisture 10s at ahove 50 degrees F temperature for period necessary for prohihlred. hydrdtlon of cement and hardening of concrete. Dusting with dry cement to ahsorh excess water is C. Cure flmx surfaces only as specified herein and in accordance with Section 1905, UBC. Membrane curing compound method not permitted for interior cast-in-place concrete slaha. D. Spraying: sprdy water over floor slah areas and malntain wet for seven (7) days or spread polyethylene film over floor slah areas, lapping edges and sides, minimum 6 inches and sealmg with pressure sensitive tape; cover with plywmd or othenvlse protect film from damage; maintain in place for seven (7) days. E. Vertical Surfaces: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 10 days CONCRETE. CMWD 03ooO ~ 4 F. (2ual,ty Control: Proper curing of concrete surfaces shall he the responsibility of the Contractor under thls section. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Sections 01400 Quality Control and 01410 Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with Testing Lahoratory. 3.9 PATCHING A. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and all adjoining work stained hy leakage of concrete. Remove all fins, hurts and projections by grinding. Patch voids, rock pockets, holes, cracks and similar imperfectmm hy chipping loose concrete and exposing clean, sound aggregate. 3.10 DEFECTIVECONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Remove concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dunensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will he determined hy the Owner's Representative. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up. repair or replace exposed concrete except upon express approval ofher's Representative for each individual area. END OF SECTION CONCRETE. CMWD 03ooO. 5 SECTION 03345 COKCRETE FlNISHlNG PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide finishes on cast-in-piace concrrtv as called hr on the Drawings. specified herein. and needed lor a complete and proper insrallatlon. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work oi this Srctlon include, hut are not necessarily limlted to, General 2. Section 02521 - Archltectural concrete paving (flnahes nut specified in this section). 3. Sectlon 03000. Cast-In-place concrete. Conditions. Supplementary Condlrlclns, and Secrlons in Division 1 oithese Speciftcarlons. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent pnrvlsions of Sectlon 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Prnceed, suhmlt: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's speclhcatlons and Crrher data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturer's recnmmenrled insrallntion procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; procedures used on rhc Work. Designated Represenratlw. will hecornr the hasis hr accepting DT rejecting actual installatiun 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers (~iskilld workmen th<mlughiy tr;tlned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar wlth rhc \pec~t~rJ requlrernenrh and mcrhds needed fur proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Except as may he mdcllllvd tlrreln or c>therwlx dlrectrrl hy rhe Owner's Designated Representative. comply with ACI 301, "Spuclflcarlcm.* fix Srrusrural G,ncrctr for Buildings." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE. ANI) HAN1,LING A. Comply with pertinent pnwlrlonr IliScctll,n Olh14 PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Carefully study thr Ihaulng\ and these Sprclticatlmb. and determine the location, extent. and type 2. As required fur rhr W<A. pride the fi~ll~~w~nl: materrals. or equals approved in advance hy the of requlred concrew l1nIhe>. Owner's Desigwted Reprexnrative. B. Concrete materials: Gunplv wlth pertlnent proveions of Section 03300, except as may he modified CONCRETE FINISHING 03345-1 herein. c. Liquid honding agent: "Weld-Crete," manuiactured hy the Larsen Products Corpc1ratlon. D. Curing and protection paper: 1, Approved products: a. "Sisalkraft, Change Label:" h. Equal products complying with ASTM C171. staining paper such as "Slsalkraft. Seekure 896." or equal paper faced with polyethylene film. 2. Where concrete will he exposed and will he subjected to ahrasion. such as floor slahs. use non- E. Liquid curing agents: 1. Where applicatlon of specified finish materials will he inhihited hy use of curing agents. cure the 2. For curing other areas, use "Hunt TLF manufactured hy Hunt Process Company. Inc. suhce hy water only; do nor use chemical cure. F. Floor sealer: 1. Acceptable products: 'Ashford Formula' as manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company. 1201 W. Spring Creek Place, Springville. UT 84663, l(800) 489-5663. Provide manufacturer's standard written 20 yeadl0 year warranty G. Slip-resistant abrasive aggregate: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Provide aluminum oxide, 14/36 pding a. Carhorundum Company; h. Norton Company; c. 1. M. Scofleld Company. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide orher materials, not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper Installation, as selected by the Conuactor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Designated Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACECONDITlONS A. Examine the areas and Conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrlmenral to tlmely and proper completion ofthe Work. Do nor proceed until unsatlsiactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. General: 1. After removal of forms, give the concrete surface one or mnre of the flnishes specified helow where 2. Revlse the finishes as needed to secure the approval of the Owner's Designated Representative. so Indicated on the Drawlnp. B. As-cast finish: 1. Rough form finish: a. Leave the surfaces with the texture Imparted hy forms. except patch tie holes and defects. h. Remove fins exceeding 6 mm (1/4") in height. a. Coordinate as necessary to secure form construction using smooth, hard, uniform surfaces. with 2. Smooth form finish: number of seams kept to a practical minimum and In a uniform and orderly pattern. CONCRETE FINISHING 03345-2 h. Patch tie holes and defects c. Remove fins completely. C. Ruhhed finishes: 1. Provide these finishes only where specifically called for. and then only on a "smooth torm finish 2. Smooth ruhhed finish: hase as descrihed ahove. a. Produce on newly hardened concrete no later than the day fdhwing tnrm remcn'al. h. Wet the surfaces, and mh with a carborundum hrick or other abrasive until uninm color and c. &I not use a cement grout other than the cement paste drawn from the concrete itself hy thr texture are produced. 3. Grout cleaned finish: ruhhing process. a. h. C. d. e. f. g. h. 4. Cork floated finish: i. a. Remove forms at an early stage, and no later than three days after placement. c. Remove burrs and fins. h. Remove ties. d. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with sufficient water to produce a stiff e. Dampen the wall surface. f. Apply mortar with a firm ruhher float or with a trowel, filling all surface voids. g. Compress mortar into voids using a slow-speed grinder or stone. h. If the mortar surface dries too rapidly to permit proper compacting and finishing, apply a small i. Produce the final texture with a cork floar wine a swirling motion. mortar. amount of water with a fog sprayer. Do not start cleaning operations until all contiguous surfaces to he cleaned are completed and accessible. Do not permit cleaning as the work progresses. Mix one part portland cement and 1,112 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having the consistency of thick paint. color matching the color of surrounding concrete, as determined hy a trial patch. Substitute white portland cement for part of the gray portland cement as required to produce a Wet the surface of the concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from the grout, and apply the grout uniformly with brushes or spray gun. coat the surface and fill all air huhhles and holes. Immediately after applying the grout. scrub the surface vigorously with a cork float or stone to float, sack, or other means. While the grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working the surface with a ruhher vigorously with clean hurlap. After the surface whites from drying (about 30 minutes at normal temperatures). ruh Keep the surface damp for at least 36 hours after final rubbing. D. Unspecified finish: If the finish of fnrmed surfaces IS not specifically called nut elsewhere in the Contract Il,cuments. provide the follnwlng finlshes as applicahle. 1. Rnueh form finish: 2. Smooth fnrm finish: a. For all concrete suddces nnt exposed to puhlic view. a. For all concrete surfaces exposed to puhlic view. 3.3 FINISHING SLABS A. Definition of finishing tolerances: 1. "Class A" True plane within 3 mm (1/8") in 3 meten (ten feet) as determined by a 3 meter (ten 2. "Class B:" True plane within 6 mm (1/4") in 3 meters (ten feet) as determined hy a 3 meter (ten foot) straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. foot) straightedge placed anywhere on the slah in any direction. CONCRETE FlNISHlNG 03345-3 3. "Class C:" True plane withln 6 mm (l/4") in 600 mm (two feet) as determlned hy a 600 mm (two foot) straightedge placed anywhere on the slah in any direction. tolerance, roughen the surface wlth stiff hrushes or rdkes hefore the final set. 8. Scratched fmish: After the concrete has heen placed, consolidated. struck off, and leveled to a Class C C. Floated finsh: 1. After the concrete has heen placed. consolidated, struck off, and leveled. do not work the concrete further until ready for floating. 2. Begin floating when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sutfvxntly to permit the operation. 3. During or after the first floating, check the planeness of the surface with a 3 meter (ten to<>t) straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. 4. Cut down high spots and fill low spots, and produce a surface with a Class B tolerance throughout. 5. Refloat the slah Immediately to a uniform sandy texture. D. Troweled finish: troweling. a. Produce initial surface relatively free from defects, hut which still may show some trowel h. Provide hand troweling when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the c. Thoroughly consolidate surface hy hand troweling. a. For concrete on metal deck, Class B tolerance is acceptable. in a plane of Class A tolerance. h. On surfaces intended to suppnrt floor coverings, use Finding or other means as necessary and 1. Provide a floated finish as described above. followed by a power troweling and then a hand marks. surface. 2. Provide a finlshed surface essentially free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and remove all defects of such magntrude as would show through the floor covering. E. Broom finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as descrihed above. 2. While the surface is still plastic, provide a textured finish by drawing a fiher hristle hroom uniformly 3. Unless othenvlse directed hy the Owner's Designated Representative, provide the texturing in one 4. Prnvide "light," "medium," or "coarse" texturlng as directed hy the Owner's Designated nver the surface. direction only. Representatlve or otherwise called for on the Drawings. F. Exposed aggregate finah: 2. While the Surface is still plastlc. emhed an appmved aggregate uniformly into the surface hy light 1. Prnvide a floated finish as described ahovr. 3. Provide complete cnveraCe tn the depth of a single stone. 4. Float the surface until the ernhedded stone IS fully Coated with mOrrdr and the surface has heen 5. After the matrix has hardened sufflclently to prevent dislodgement ofagpegatr. hegm exposure. ramplng. hrought to a true plane with Class B tolerance. a. Allow cop~ous quantlties of water, wlthout fnrcr, to flow nver the suriace of the cnncrete while h. Contmue rhls operatam until the agneeate IS unlfnrmly exposed hut not d~slc,dged. working time for expsure ot agmegdte. the matrlx encaslng the aggregate 1s removed hy hrushing with a fine hristle hrush. 6. An approved chemical retarder Sprayed onto the freshly floated surface may he used tn extend rhe G. Unspecified finish: If the finish of slah surfaces is not specifically called for elsewhere in the Cnntract Documents, provide the followlng finishes as appllcahle: 1. Scratched finish: a. For surfaces scheduled 10 receive bond-applied cementitious applications. CONCRETE FINISHING 03345-4 2. Floated finish: 3. Troweled ilnish: a. For surfaces intended to receive roofing. a. For floors Intended as walking surfaces; h. Floors scheduled to receive floor coverings oi waterproof memhrane; c. Parking areas. a. Garage ramps. a. Exterior platforms, steps, and landings; h. Interlor and exterm pedestrian ramps. 4. Broom finish: 5. Nondip finish: 3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excesslvely hot and ccdd temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Preservation of moisture: 1. Unless othewise directed hy the Owner's Designated Representative, apply one of the following procedures to concrete not in contact with forms. immediately after completion of placement and finishing: a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling; c. Application of sand kept continuously wet; h. Application of absorptive mats or fahric kept continuously wet; d. Continuous application of steam (nor exceeding 66 degrees C [150 degrees Fl) or mist spray; f. Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved hy the Owner's Desimated e. Application of waterproof sheet materials specified in Part 2 ofthis Section; g. Appllcatlon of the curing agent specified in Parr 2 of this Section or elsewhere in the Contract 2. Where forms are exposed to the sun, minimize moisture loss hy keeping the forms wet until they can 3. Cure concrete hy preserving moisture as specified ahove for at least seven days. Representatwe; Documents. he removed safely. C. Temperature, wind, and humidity: 1. Cold weather: a. When the mean daily temperature outdoors is less than 4.4 degrees C (40 degrees F), maintain the temperature of the concrete hetween 10 degrees C (50 dekrees F) and 21 degrees C (70 dernees F) for the requlred curlng perid. h. When necessary. provide proper and adequate heating system capahk of maintaimng the required hear withuut Injury due ro concentration of hear. c. Do not use comhusrlon hcaters durmg the ilrst 24 hours unless precautions are taken t(> 2. Hot weather: When necessary. provide wind hrraks, fog spraying, shading, sprinkling, ponding, or prevent exposure ofrhe concrete to exhaust eases which contam carhon dioxide. operations will allow. wet covering with a hght ccdored material. applvlng as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing 3. Rate of temperature chance: Keep the temperature <lf the air immediately adlacent to the concrete during and immediately fdlow~ng the curing period as unlform as yxrssihle. D. Protectlon from mechanical injury: 1. Durlng the curing perad, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturhances such as heavy shock, had stresses, and excessive vlhration. 2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage from construction equipment, mater& and methods hy application of curlng procedures. and hy rain and running water. 3. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to overstress the concrete. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FINISHING 03345-5 Division 04 Masonry SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provlde unit masonry where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work 1. Documenrs affecting work of this Section include. hut are not necessarily Itmired to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMIiTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings of reinforcement for the work of this Section, in sufficient detail to show fahricdtion, 4. Pertinent other submittals if required by the referenced Standard. requirements; installation, and anchorage; 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specifled requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Comply with pertinent requirements of governmental agencles having Jurisdiction. and comply with: 1. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, "Speclfications for Masonry Structures," except revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to: a. Exclude Sectinn 1.7; c. Modify Article 2.1.1.4 hy deletlng requirements fur installing vent pipes and conduits huilt h. Exclude Article 1.5.1.2; 2. Retain a copy of the referenced Standard at the jnh site throughout progress of the Work. into masonry. C. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the site where approved hy the Owner's Representatlve, provide mock-up masonry panels. a. Provide one mock-up panel for each comhlnation of face hrick. bond pattern. mnrtar color, h. The mock-up panels may he part of the Work. and may he incorporated into the finished and joint type used in the Work. Work when so approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 2. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to he part of the finished Work. completely demolish and c. Revise as necessaq to secure the Owner's Representative's approval. remove them from the joh site upon completion and acceptance of the other work nf this Section. UNIT MASONRY. CMWD 04200-1 D. Cold weather conditions 1. Wet or frozen units shall not he laid. Temperatures of units when laid shall not he less than ZO'F, 2. Aggregates and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar and pour temperatures between 3. Malnrain mortar temperature on hoards above 32°F. 40°F and 120°F. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614 and with pertinent provisions of the referenced Standard. B. Materials of this section shall be protected to maintain quality and physical requirements. C. All masonry units shall be stored on the jobsite so that they are protected from ram, stored off the pnund and kept clean from contamination. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Loadbearing concrete masonry units shall conform to UBC Standard 21-4, Grade N. and ASTM C90. All units shall he mediumweight, 1900 minimum net psi, as manufactured by Angelus Block Company, lnc. 1705 N. Main Street, Orange, CA 92865, (714) 637-8594 or equals when approved in advance by the Owner's Representative. Block colors are from Angelus' Block custom color palette and are a long lead item. 1. Split face masonry to he nominal 8x8~16 'Sienna Brown' as manufactured by Angelus Blnck 2. Precision mawnry tohe nominal 8x4~16 'Champagne' as manufactured hy Angelus Block Company. Company. 2.2 MORTAR A. Mortar shall be Spec-Mix Preblended Masonry Mortar. typ S, conforming to the proportion and property specifications of ASTM C270. as manufactured hy E-2 Mix, Inc. Sun Valley, CA or equal when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. Color tn be selected from all available colors from approved manufacturer. Field mix mortars are not acceptable. B. Use only preblended morars manufactured by computer controlled hatching. Digital printouts of the material proportions of each hatch must he availahle upon request. C. Mortar materials: 1. Monar shall he a portland cement-lime mortar comprlsed of type 1/11 portland cement conforming ASTM C144. to ASTM C150. ryp S hydrated lime conforminp tu ASTM C207. and washed sand conforming to 2. Admixtures: Use no admixturrs. air-entraining agents, plasticizers. salts or antifreeze compounds unless specified and apprnved In advance hy the Building Cfficial and preblend mnrtar mix manufacturer. 3. Water: Use clean, potablr and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. 2.3 GROUT A. Prehlended grout: Pre-Mix Products, Spec Concrete 30/70. 2CCOpsi. pout mix manufactured by E-Z Mix, Inc. may be used per manufacturer's specifications. Field mix grouts are not acceptable. B. Grout shall conform to UBC Standard 21-19 or ASTM C476, propnrtions per UBC Table 21-B. UNIT MASONRY * CMWD 04200-2 C. Use of fine or course pout shall he per UBC Table 21 -C D. Minimum compressive strength shall he 20oOpsi E. Grout shall he offluid consistency with an 8 inch to 10 inch slump. Lower slump may he used for large pout spaces. F. Admixtures: Pre-Mix Products Grout Additive. Use per manufacturer’s specifications, 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing ban shall conform tn ASTM A615. Grade 60. B. Joint reinforcement shall conform to UBC Standard 21-10 C. Metal ties and anchors shall meet the requirements of UBC Section 2102.7.2 D. All metal reinforcement shall he free from loose rust and other matter or coatings detrimental to hond. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1. Masonry units shall he sound, dry, and clean from all foreign matter when placed in the wall. 2. Reinforcement ban shall he free of kinks or bends, except for bends detailed in the drawings. B. Foundation 1. If site conditions or layout is in any way improper, masonry work shall not begin until cleared hy the 2. Foundation shall he level and at correct grade so that the initial hed joint shall not he less than %” 3. Surface of foundation shall he clean and fiee nf deleterious marerails. Surface shall he roughened to 4. If foundation dowel must he hent to alip with a vertical cell, it shall not slope more than 1” governing authority. nor more than 1”. a full amplitude of 1/16. horizontally to 6” vertically. 3.2 MIXING OF MORTAR A. Sprc-Mix Prehlended Mortar 1. Mix In mechanical hatch mixer with the minimum amount of water tn produce a workahle consistency. 2. M~rtar may he retemprred once to maintain plasticity and workahiliry. Retempering on mnrtar hoards shall he done hy adding water within a hasin formed within the mnrtar. Rework the mortar into the water. No mortar shall he used heynnd 2 M hours from the time it was <riginally mixed. 3.3 MIXING OF GROUT A. Water content of the grout shall he adjusted to provide proper fluid consistency to endhie placement under existing field conditions without segregation of rhr constituents. B. Do not use grout more than 1 M hours after initial mixing UNIT MASONRY. CMWD 04200-3 C. Prehlended grout: 1. Mix in mechanical mixer until uorkahle, hut not to exceed 10 minutes. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY UNITS A. General 1. All masonry shall he laid true, I~vKI. plumh and In accordance with the plans. 2. Units shall he laid in running hond unless otherwtse shown on the drawings. 4. Concrete masonry units shall not he wetted unless otherwise approved. 3. Cutting of units shall he neat. true anJ made hy masonry saw. 5. Construction supports shall nor hc attached tc) the wall except where specifirai~y permitted hy the Owner’s Representative. B. Protection 1. Extreme care shall he taken to prevent grout or mortar stains on exposed suddces. Any mortar or 2. Tops of all unsheltered walls and partially completed wails shall he covered when work is not in grout contact shall he cleaned immedlately. progress. C. Joints 1. Initial bed joint shall not he less than %” nor more than 1” in thickness. All cells to he filled with grout shall he kept free from mortar dropping so the grout will make full confact with the foundation. 2. Thickness of joints shall 3/8”?1/8”. 3. Head and bed joints of hollow units shall he filled with mortar for the thickness of the face shell. 4. Horizontal joint reintorcement shall he fully emhedded in monar with a minimum 5/8” cover Solid units shall have full head and hed joints. herween joint retnfclrcemenr and exp(aed face. Mortar joints with wire reinforcement shall he at least twice the thicknrah oithe wtre Jrameter. 5. All mortar joints on KX~W~ walls, unless otherwise specified, shall he concave and double struck to produce a dense, sllchrly concave surface of rhc masonry unit. 6. If an installed untt IS moved, It shall he removed trwn the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcement shall he placcJ a’ detailed on the drnwtngh and secured against displacement at intervals not to exceed 200 har dtamurcrs. B. Tolerance for placemenr: I. In flexural elemenrh shall hc fl/2” for Jrqual to 8” or Irsz. fl” for dequal to 24” or Less hut mure than 8”. fl %” for Jmcarcr than 24”. (Jlr the Illstance from compressam face of flexural member to the cenrroid oftenslle reint<acement). 2. hngitudinal kcarxm shall hc. t?”. C. Reinforcing hars, except pint rclntorcement. shall he ~(~mpletely emhedded in mortar or kmut and have a mintmum cover. including rhv mwmry unlt. ~4 ar least %”, 1 !h” when exposed to weather, and 2” when exposed to soil. D. Clear distance hetween surface CIi remforctng har and any surface of a masonry unit shall not he less than %“for fine grout and %“fix cottrx Lmwt. 1. Horizontal reinforcement hars may rest on the cross wehz of hollow masonry untts. E. Reinforcing hars and wire lcnnt ranforcement shall he lapped as indicated on the drawings. 3.1 GROUTING UNIT MASONRY. CMWD 04200-4 A. General 1. Reinforcement hars shall he In place and secured prior to grouting. 2. All cells and areas where grout IS to he placed shall he free from mortar fins greater than M”. droppings, and foreign materials that would prevent the wall from heing properly grouted. 4. Segregation of grout materials and damage to the masonry shall he avoided during the grouting 3. Grout shall completely fill all designated spaces, and shall he confined to those spaces. 5. Grout shall he Consolidated hefore loss of plasticity. process. a. Grout pours 12” or less may he puddled. h. Grout pours greater than 12” shall he consolidated and rrconsolidated hy mechanical vihration 6. Stop grout poun 1 M” helow top of wall. Where bond beams occur, stop grout a minimum of M“ 7. Structural masonry walls shall he solid grouted unless othenvise specified. 8. Grouting of beam across openings shall he done in one continuous pour. 9. Anchor bolts shall he solidly grouted in place with 1” minimum of grout hetween the holt and the 10. Spaces around all metal door frames and other huilt-in items shall he solidly grouted. using a low velocity vihrator with a maximum head dtameter of %”. helow. masonry. B. Low lift grouting 1. Grout pours shall not exceed 5’0’. Cleanouts are not required. C. High lift grouting 1. Cleanour holes shall he provided at the bottom of all cells containing vertica reinforcement in 2. Grout shall he placed in lifts not to exceed 6‘0’. The full height in each wall section shall he poured hollow unit masonry, hut spaced nor more than 32” on center. in 1 day with no interruption greater than 1 hour. 3.8 WALL CLEANING AND PROTECTION Minimize any mortar or grout stains on the wall during construction. Any stains that occur shall he removed immediately. The tops of all unshelrered walls and partially completed walls shall he covered when work IS not in progress. Where atmosphere is dry. a hghr fog spray may he apphed to masonry surfaces for three days after constructinn. At the conclusmn of the masonry work. removed all scaffolding and equipmenr used during cnnstruction, and remove all dehrls, refuse and surplus masonry material from the site. Clean exyxxed masonry wdk with a hghr sandhlast. All openings, doors, window frames, etc., near the area to he sandblasted shall he covered hefnre the sandhlasring starts. Care shall he taken to avoid contamination tu areas that are not to he sandblasted. END OF SECIION UNIT MASONRY. CMWD 04200-5 Division 05 Metals SECTION 05 120 STRUcrURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide structural steel framing members, galvanized and shop-primed and other items needed for the construction shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are nor necessarily limited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AI% M015L ~ Manual of Steel Construction. B. AlSC S323 Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards. C. ASIM A36 - Structural Steel. D. ASTM A53 ~ Hot Dipped. Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. E. ASTM A108 ~ Steel Bars, Carbn, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. F. ASTM A123. Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Chtings on Iron and Steel Products. G. ASTM A153 . Zinc Coating (Hot Dip,) on Iron and Steel Hardware H. ASTM A307 . Carhon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners, I. ASTM A500. Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carhln Steel Structural Tuhing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM C1107. Packaged Dq, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Non-Shrmk). K. AWS A2.4 . Standard Weldlnp Symhds. L. AWS D1.1 . Structural WeldmpGde. M. AWS WHB-1 - Quahficdtam and Cerrif~cation. N. AWS A5.1 . Carbn Steel Cowred Arc-Weldlnp Elecmdes 0. SSP€ - Steel Structures Painting Gwncil, SP-2, Hand Tool Clraning P. UBC Chapter 22, Division 1X - Alkrwdhle Stress Design and Plastic Des~gn for Srmcrurdl Steel Buildings, Q. ASTM A108. Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finish, Srdndard Quality. 1.3 SUBMIRALS SRUcrURAL STEEL. CMWD 05120 ~ 1 A. Comply wlth pertinent provisions of Section 01300. 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations ofsrmctural members, connections, openings, attachments and fasteners. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations ~fstru~tural memhers. connection\. openings, 2. Indicate cambers. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lend.. C. Submit Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that prcducts meet or exceed specified requirements D. Suhmit Mill Test Reports showing structural strength, destmctive and non-desmctive test analysis and attachments and fasteners. identification. E. Submit Manufacturer's Certificates certifyiig welders employed on the work have been AWS qualified within the previous 12 months, in accordance with AWS-WHB-1. F. Suhmit fabricator's and erector's qualifications. 1.4 QUALln ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members and perform work in accordance with AISC-M015L, B. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.l and California Building code Chapter 22A, Divislon IX, 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing stmcturdl steel work minimum five years experience. B. Erector: Company specializing m performing smctural steel work with minimum five years experience. 1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements. PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Srmcturdl Steel Memhers: ASTM A36. B. Srructurdl Tuhing; ASTM A500, Grdde B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. Schedule 40. D. &)Its, Nuts and Washers: ASM A307 plvdnned to ASM A153 for gdvanized memhers, American Natlondl Course Threaded Senes. E. Welding Materials: AWS A5.1, E'IOXX, rype and procedures required hy electrode manufacturer for materials hemg welded. F. Grout: ASTM C1107. non-shrink rype, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggvegate, cement, STRUCTURAL YEEL. CMWD 05120 ~ 2 psi at 7 days; ofconsistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working time. water reducing and plasticizing additives. capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of8,W G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Series p10-99 modified alkyd, red color, air dried, by Tnemec or equal as approved in accordance with Section 01630 for suhtitutions. H. Touch-Up Material for Galvanized Steel: Ready mixed, zinc-rich galvanizing compound. DEVCON Z, by Devcon Cop, Danvers, MA, GALVICON, hy Southern Coatings, Sumrer, SC, or equal as approved in accordance with Section 01630 for substitutions. 2.2 NOTUSED 2.3 FINISH A. Prepare strucrural compnent surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2 B. Shop prime snuctural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will he fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete or high strength hoked. 1. Clean surfaces to he primed, remove mill scale, grease, dirt and foreign matter. Two coats required for 2. Apply prlmer by brush or spray. Thoroughly work into joints, angles and open spaces. Allnw primer to 3. Clean contact surfaces immediately prior to assembly, leave unpainted. 4. Coat machined surfaces with approved removable coating to prevent corrosion. 5. After erection, clean field welds, field bolts and abraded portions and apply one additional brush spot 6. All sutfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-applied fireproofing shall he free of lubricants, oils, paint or parts in contact but inaccessible for pamting after erection. dry and harden prior to handling for delivery to the site. coat using same paint material. other matter which will impair adhesion of fireproofing. C. Galvanize structural steel members where indicated to coating thickness in accordance with ASTM A123. All steel expased to exterior weather conditions shall he G60 galvanized. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Veriiy that field conditions are acceptahle and are ready tn receive work. 1. Report discrepancies hetween drawings and field dimensions to Architect before commencing work. B. Beginning of mstallation means erector accepts exlstmg conditinns and surfaces underlying or adjacent to work of this section. 3.2 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads and stresses, and for sufficient temporary hrdcing to maintain snucture safe, plumh and in true ahpment until compktwn of erection and Instahion of permanent bracing. Prnvide bracing for dead and live loads and wlnd loads. Keep hrdclng in place until required to maintain safe conditions. B. cnncrdctnr shall he responsible fnr correcting detailing and fabrication erron and for correct fitting of all members and compnenrs. C. Field weld components indicated on structural drawings. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect and Structural Englneer. STRUCTURAL STEEL. CMWD 05120.3 E. When approved, perfom cutting, punching% drilling and tappmg to accommodate work. Ohrain accurate data as indlcated on shop and erection drawings. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not shop primed except surfaces to he in contact with concrete. G. Grout under haseplares with the specified non-ski grout. H. Provide bolts with templates and diapm. Contractor shall he responsible for proper location and installation of bolts. Correct deficiencies or errors. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AlSC S323. 3.4 NOT USED 3.5 PUNCHING AND DRILLING A. Punch material 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt, wherever thickness of metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the bolt plus 118 inch. B. Drill or suh-punch and ream where metal is equal to or more than the diameter of the holt plus 1/8 inch. Make diameter for sub-punched and suh-drilled holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of bolt. C. Precisely locate holes to ensure passage of holt through assemble materials without drifting. Enlarge holes when necessary to receive bolts hy reaming. Poorly matched holes will he rejected. D. Punch and ream holes to receive high strength bolts. 3.6 WELDING A. B. C. D. E. F. Conform to AWS D1.l and UEC Chapter 22A, Division 1X per AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Perform welding hy direct electric arc process. Use nperators cerrified within preceding 12 month period as Chlp welds to remove slag. Use wire hrush to demonstrate uniformity of section, smmthness of welded metal, freedom from undercuts. nverlays or feather edges and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Visually inspect edges and ends nf fillets and hurt pinr welds for indication of good fusinn and penetrdtlon into base metal. Grind smtwth all exposed welds. prnvided no stresses will he mansmltted through a flame-cur surfacr. Make ps cuts smmth and regular in Use of cutting torch will he allnwed where meral heing cut dws not carry srress during the operations, and contour. To determme effecrlve width nf memhers suhlected to gas cutting:, deduct 1/8 inch knm width of Lpds cut allgn bolt is not permlrred. edges. Make radius of gas cut fillets as large as prdctlcahk, hut in no case less than one inch. Gas cutting to 3.7 CLEANING AND SlR4IGHlENlNG A.' Before fahrication, thoroughly wire-brush material clean of scale and rust. Straighten by methods that will not injure materials. STRUCTURAL STEEL I CMWD 05120.4 B. After punching or working, remove twists or bends before parrs are assembled. Make finished members free from twists, bends and open jotnt, when erected. 3.8 FllTlNG A. Closely fit members. finished me to line and in precise position required 10 allow accurare rrecrmn and proper pining m the field. B. Drilling to enlarge unfair holes will nor he allowed. Light drifting to draw parts together will he permitted, Do not heat rolled secttons, except for minor details. 3.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Required testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 01410. 3.10 HANDLlNG A. Both in shop and in field, transpon, handle and erect to preclude damage or overstressing of any componenr. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL. CMWD 05120.5 Division 06 Wood and Plastics SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide wood. nails, holw, screws, frammg anchors and other rough hardware, and other items needed. and perform rough carpentry for the constructlon shown on the Drawings, as specified hereln. and as needed for a complete and proper instalktlon. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited tu, Generdl Conditions. Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D4601 ~ Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. Chapters 7 and 23A, CBC C. PS 1-95 U. S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywocd D. WWPA . Western Lumber Grading Rules 88. July 1988 Edition, hy Western Wood Products Asscxiation. E. APA . American Plywocd Association DesigrdConstructlon Guide. F. AQMD . Local Air Quality Management Dlstrict Regulations. G. AWPA - Amerlcan Wwd Preservers Awxlation - Manual of Recommended Practice, C-1 H. WCLIB . West Cwast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading Rules No. 17. 1.3 QUALIlY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled wt~rkmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and ct~mpletely famikar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of thls Sectwn. 8. Rough Carpentry Lumkr: Visihle grade stamp on all products required. c. Grade Srdmp: Assxiation under whose ruk It was graded, or official grade mark of other recognized grading agencies using grading rules, equivalent to WWPA or WCLIB. D. AssKiation performing firddlng and grade marking of lumher shall he approved hy the Owner's Representative and the Division of the State Archirecr. E. Nailing ~UN and nail operators shall he approved m accordance with Title 8 Construction Safety Orders. 1.4 SUBMllTALS A. Submit product data and current ICED Evaluation Reports for framing anchors. ROUGH CARPENTRY - CMWD 06100-1 1.5 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLINC A. Do not deliver rough carpentry item unrtl slte condltlons are adequare to receive the Work. Prntect irems irom weather while in cranslt. E. Store lumber and plywd at the site unllrr cnver or orherwise protected arainst exposure to weather, raise above ground and out of contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumher and plywcd and prnvide for air circulation within and around sracks ani under temporary covers. For pressure treated hher and plywod, provide spacers between courses to permlr alr circulatinn. 1.6 PROJECTCONDITIONS A. Cmperate with other trades In cnnrdlnarlng their Work with the Work of this Section. Prnvide wwd grounds, blocking and nailer where lndlcated or as requlred for Work of other wades. PART 1. PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Lumber: Graded in accorhce with WWPA or WCLIB, maximum moisture content of 19 percent at time standards of the gradmnp asxrratlon unless othenvlse Indicated on Drawings, use the following grades: of srmctural loading. Prnvide Douglas Fir Larch for stnlctural and framing lumber. surfaced four sides to 1. Joists, rafters, beams. Ilntels. horiznntal framlnp. yxxts, studs and vertical framing: No. 1 unlevj 2. Non-hearing studs anlf plates, non-structural furring, concealed blocking, snipping and miscellaneous 3. Srmcrural bawinrb rakr precedrnre f,>t lumher Fades. Douglas Fir Plywood Shearhlnc: Section Z312A, CK, PS-1, APA structural 1 rated sheathing, exposure 1, thickness as indicated, span ratlng SI:^ for spacmc. Nails. Spikes and Staples: Sectlon 23 1RA.3.4. CB€ Galvanized for exterinr applications, high humidlry Comply with Tahle 23A-11-13-1, CK;. Use common nalk mly. locations and treated WXJ: plan hsh fix crhrr Inrerl<rr Iarations; size and type to suit applration. exterior Inatims, hlrh hundlrv h,catlons and trearcd WN J. plain finish for other interior locat~ons. Bolts. Nuts, Washers. Law. lhr and .Screws: Secrnm 231XA.6. CBC, sired to suit application, galvanized for Sectam 01400 fnr acceprahk rypv5 and requlreJ tcstln)! Fasteners: Expanslim type or p>udcr actuated r\v for anchoract. tn did masonry or concrete. Refer to Stock Framing Gmnecrnn: S.ctton 2318A.4. CK typb dcatrd on bdwings, galvanized, with nails fully driven in all holes In rach taw ‘icttnnector. 1. Manufacturers: Slmprm Srrcmr Tle CCI.. Inc. San Lrandro, CA. equal products hy Harlen Meral Prducts, Cmpron. (:A. 5lwr Metal I’n Jucrb, Ll\um<rt., CA. Teco G)., Germantnwn. MD, or KC. Metals. R~vers~dc. CA. ma\ he suhmltred tc,r approval (x equal as apprnved in accourdance with Sectam 01W for Suhrrlnlrlon.r. otherwise indicated or noted on Drawings. nailers and hackinr: No. 2. Non-Stock Framing C~nnecr~)rv Gmf~m t,) dera~ls. Preservative (Pressure) TreareJ Lumher: Srctlcm 2303A. CK Conform tn AWPA manual of recommended pract~ce. Usu presewative complying wlth C.2 and C.9. Conform to AQMD, Local Regulations. 1. Douglas Fir Larch. uxd ab requlred hy Secrlon 2303A.1, CBC, shall confnrm to the following: ROUGH CARPENTRY. CMWD 06100-2 a. Lumher shall he WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped. b. Lumher shall be No. 1 Fade or hetter unless indicated otherwise on Drawings 1. Waterproof Memhrane: ASrU D4601; Type 11, asphalt saturated glass felt. J. Parapet Wall Paneling, Fire Retardant Lumher: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated. as defined in Section 703 CBC. Lumber shall be pade stamped hy an approved agency at the facton;. and shall hear identification Indicating the fire performance rating thereof. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING, FURRING AND STRIPPING A. 8. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1. 1- K. L. Erect wmd framing, furring, stripping and nailing memhers true to lines and levels. Do not devlate from true alignment more than Id inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest wihle lengths Construct and erect required headers and lintels. Double wall framing members at openings over 100 square inches. Space short memhers above and helow openings in same manner as for walls. Provide douhle joist headers at joist ends and around openings unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Bridge joists and rafters to conform with Section 2316A.2.4.4.1.4 CEC and as noted on plans. For pre- manufactured joists. provide bridging in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Construct walls with studs of size and spacing indicated. Install single sill memher at bottom and douhle plate at top. Stager upper and lower members of douhle plate with joints not less than 4 feet O.C. or as treated lumber. Indicated on Drawings. Where sill or any wood memher contacts concrete or masonry, install preservatively Provide one row of solid blocking not less than 2 inches nominal thickness and same width oi stud at ceiling than two 16d ndlk. and floor lines and at spacing not to exceed 8 feet on center vertically. Fit snugly and attach wlth not less Install3 studs at comers. Conform to section 2320A.11.7, CK where pipes penetrate silk or plates Cutting and Notchmg: Conform to Section 2320A.11.9, CBC Bored Holes: Conform to Section 2320A.11.10. CBC Gmforrn to Section 708, Callfnmia Buildtng Cxle for fire hkrks and draft stops. 3.2 NOT USED 3.3 PLYWOOD SHEATHING A. Thickness as indicated on the Drawings. minimum thickness 1/2 inch. B. bundq Nailing: Not less than 3/8 inch from edge. spaced not more than 6 inches on center, unless noted otherwise on Dmwmngs. ROUGH CARPENTRY ~ CMWD 06100-3 C. Blocking: Panel edges shall hear on framlng memhers or solid blocking. D. Minmum Size Vemcal Panel: 16 inches wide. E. Minimum Sue Horizontal Panel: 24 inches wide. 3.4 FOUNDATION FRAMING. PLATES, SILLS AND SLEEPERS A. Preservative treated wood required. 3.5 HORIZONTAL FRAMING A. Bearmg: 1-1/2 inch minimum on wood or metal, 3 inches on masonry. Lay framing memhers with cruwn up. Memhers with knots at bottom not permitted. B. Lateral Support: Use solid blocking. cross hridging or other approved means C. Lap joists a minimum of 3 inches when framed from opposite sides of a heam. Do not run joists continuous beyond one span unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. Openings: Double joists required for trimmer and headers for openings 4 fi. or larger unless Indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. Provide ties. purlins and blocking in conformance with Section 2316A, CEC 3.6 BACKING A. Provide backing as indicated on Drawings to support electrical fixture, fixed equipment, cahiners, grab bars, doorstops and plates. Fasten securely to kaming. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY. CMWD 06100-4 SECTION 06180 GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide glue-laminated wood heam where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Sectlon include, hut are not necessarily limited tn, General Conditions. Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AITC . American Institute ofTimher Construction . A190.1 ~ Structural Glued Laminated Timher B. ASTM D3737. Estahlishing Stresses for Structural Glued Laminated Timher. C. PS 56 I Structural Glued Laminated Timher D. Section 2312 California Building Code 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of glue lammated structural units with five years minimum experience, and certified hy the AITC. 1.4 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Withm 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, 1. Submlt shop drawings Indratmg haming sizes and camhers. suhmlr: 2. Submit product data. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE ANDHANDLING A. Comply with pertment prnvislons of Section 01614 and with prrtment provisions of the referenced Srandard. B. Dellver, store and protect members in accordance with AITC requirements for bad wrapped material PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials, Manufacture and Quality Control: Conform to Product Standard PS 56, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber". GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS - CMWD 06180 - 1 B. Lumber: Conform to Standard Gradlng rules for Western Lumber, March 1998. puhlished hy Western Wood Products hiation and West Coast Lumher Inspection Bureau. 1. Species: Douglas Fir, Larch. C. Adhesives: Wet-Use Type: Melamine, melamine-urea, phenol, resnrcinol or phenol-resorcmol t)7~s D. Laminating Combinations: Meet the requirements of Product Standard PS 56; provide allowdhk stress values of 2400 psi in bending (Fh) either face, (24F-V8). E. Service Temperature Maximum: Less than 150 degrees F maximum 2.2 FABRICATION A. AITC A190-1, ASTM D3737, Section 2312A, California Building Code, and the following requirements: 1. End joints in adjacent laminations: Separated by a minimum of 6 inches. Plain scarf end joints: Slope not steeper than 1:lO. Sttength reducing defects such as wane not he permitted in an end joint. Flnger Joints: Cut in wood which is free of knots and local grain deviation. The sum of the sizes of all knnts which appear in the heveled surface of a warfshall not exceed 1/4 the nominal width of lamination when laminations are 1-1/2 inches in thickness. and shall he reduced in proportion to rhe thickness of laminatlons to 1/8 the width of laminations when laminations are 5/8 inch or less in thickness. 2. The moisture content of lumber in a single package of laminations at the time of gluing: Less than 16 percent. The range of moisture content of various laminations assemhled into a single memher shall not exceed 5 percentage points if any piece in the assembly exceeds 12 percent. 3. Adhesive: "Wet-Use" Pipe only. B. Workmanship 1. Fahricarion: In accordance with the hesr practices with adequate plant and equipment and under 2. Gluing surfaces of laminatlons including edge and end joints: Plane surfaces, machine-surfaced supervision of properly qualified prsonnel smooth, and except for minor local occurrences. free of raised pin. tom grain, skips, hums, glazing. or other deviations from the plane of the surface thar might interfere with the contact of sound wood fiber in mating surfaces of the laminations. Gluing surfaces, whether treated or untreated shall at the time of glumg he free from dust or orher foreign matter, including any exudation or surface damage which would he detrimental 10 satisiacrory gluing. 3. At the time of gluing, variations in thickness across the width or along the length of any lamination shall not exceed plus or mmus 0.008 inch and cup should not exceed 1/32 inch fur each inch of width for lumkr nommal 1 inch and less in thlckness, and should not exceed 1/1@ inch for each inch of width fur lumber nver ncrmrnal 1-Inch thickness, hur in no event shall cup and warp exceed that which 4. Clamping Methds: Such thar the pressure IS as unifnrm as practical over the whole area. Nailing in will he straightened nur hy pressure in gluing. end or ends. Glume Pressure: Such as to assure clnse contact of the surfaces and provide a uniformly heu of chplng fnr pressure nclt he permlrted. Chnplnc may start at any point hut shall progress roan thln glue line. hut nnt less than 100 lhs. psi. Maintain pressure until the adhesive has set. Clamping time and curing process shall he in accordance with adheawe manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Flnishmg: sal all end Lram at place of fahricatlon after ends have heen finally trimmed. 2.3 COMBINATION AND APPEARANCE GRADE A. Comhinatlon 24F-V8, in conformance with AITC 203. 8. Appearance of Memhen: Industrial Grade where concealed. Architectural Grade surfaced all sides where exposed. C. Units shall he fabricated for wet use GLUE LAMINAED BEAMS. CMWD 06180.2 2.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The inspection and test procedures to he used in the production of structural glued laminated timber shall conform with Sectton 2327A, California Building Code. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTLON A. Veriiy that supports are ready to receive glue-laminated beams. 8. Verify sufficlent end hearing area. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearlng and support items. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural memhers level and plumh in correct positions. B. Provide temprav bracing and anchorage to hold memhers in place until permanently secured. C. Fit memhers together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized mcdification 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maxlmum from true position END OF SECTION GLUE LAMINATED BEAMS - CMWD 06180 ~ 3 SECTION 06240 PLASTIC LAMINATE PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide laminated plastic where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein. and as needed for a complete and proper installatinn. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited tn. General 2. Section 06400 -Architectural woodwork Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Dwision 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 8. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contmctor has received the Owner's Notlce to Proceed, suhmit: 2. Manufacturers' specificatlons and other data needed to demonstrate compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section. 3. Samples of the full range of colors and patterns available in each of the specified vades from the requirements. proposed manufacturer. Representative. will become the basis for acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the Work. 4. Manufacturer's recommended methods of insvallarion which, when approved hy the Owner's 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Sectlon. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent prwlslons of Section 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMINATED PLASTICS A. Acceptahle manufacturers: 1. Wilsonart Dlvlsion of Ralph Wilson Plastics, 600 Bruce Drive, Temple, Texas 76501 (817) 778- 2. Nevamar Corporation. 8339 Telegraph Road, Odenton, Maryland 21 113 (301) 569-5000. 3. Formica Corporation, 10155 Reading Road. Cincinnati, Ohio 45241 (513) 786-3400. 2711. B. Colors and patterns: Provide plasrlc laminate cdors selected by the Owner's Representative frnm all colors, textures. grades and finishes available from the approved manufacturer. PLASTIC LAMINATE. CMWD 06240-1 C. Qualities and types: Provide general purpose type, 0.050” thick, complying with NEMA LD3 2.2 ADHESIVES A. For installation of laminated plastlc, use only “rigid set” (urea resin) or “semi-rigld set” (PVC acetate) adhesives. Do not use so called “contact” adhesives. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisiacrory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the approved laminated plastic in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION PLASTIC LAMINATE. CMWD 06240-2 SECTION 064M ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide architectural woodwork where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 06240 - Plastic Laminate. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMl7TALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submit: 2. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fahrication, installation. anchorage, and interface of the 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under thls Section; 3. SampLes of the proposed material. work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Codes and standards: 1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having prisdiction. comply with "Manual of Millwork of the Woodwnrk Institute of Califomla for the grades specified. 2. WIC certification and stamps will he required and will he paid for hy the Conrractnr. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent prnvisinns of Sectrm 01614. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate architectural woodwork to "premium grade" standards of the Woodwork Institute of California. B. Wood: 1. On exposed portions, provide rift cut White Oak veneer plywood for natural finish. 2. On semi-exposed purtions, provide the manufacturer's standard cabinet liner as apprnved hy the ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK. CMWD 06400-1 Owner’s Representative. C. Finishing: Site finish or mill finish architectural woodwork In accordance with pertinent provisions of Section 09900 of these Specifications. 2.2 CABINETS A. Fabricate cabinets in flush overlay design with doors and drawer fronts in WIC twr A B. At the mill, install the finish hardware supplied under Section 08710 of these Speciflcations 2.3 COUNTERTOPS A. Types and sizes: 2. Where splashes are called for, provide 100 mm (4”) high coved splash and no-drip leading edge. 1. Shop fabricate countenops and splashes to the types and dlmensions shown on the Drawings. B. At laminated plastic countertops, cover tops and splashes with laminated plastic as specifled in Section 06240 of these Specifications. C. For solid surface countertops, provided solid surface countertops as manufactured hy E.1. Du Pont ,OI approved equal by the Owner’s Representative, fabricated to the types and dimension shown on the drawings. M” thick countenop, %” thick splash, manufacturer’s drip edge as detailed on the drawings. D. Will grommet holes in countertops as directed by Owner for phones. printers, etc., after installation of cahinetq. Use black plastic grommets at all drilled holes. 2.4 OTHER MATERlALS A. Provide other materials. not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper installation. as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representatwe. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the arras and conditims under which work nfthls Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrlmental to tlmely and proper completion of the Work. Do nnt proceed until unsatisidctory conditions are corrected. 3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper dlmensions for the work of this Section. 3.3 FABRICATION A. Fahricate the work of tha Srction In strict accordance wirh the approved Shop Drawings and the referenced standards. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with thc approved Shop Drawings and the referenced standards, anchoring all items flrmly mtc pnsitlon. 3.5 COMPLIANCE ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK - CMWD 06400-2 A. The Owner reserves the riKht to request and pay for an inspection hy a representative of the Woodwork Institute of California to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the specified standards. B. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the specified requirements, immediately remove the non-complying items and immedlarely replace them with items Owner for the cost of the inspections complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Ouner. and reimhurse the END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK. CMWD 06400-3 Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection SECTION 07110 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide membrane waterproofing where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily llmired to, General 3. Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster 2. Section 07410 - Preformed Metal Roofing 4. Sectlon 09310 - Ceramic Tile Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Speciflcatlons. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product dara: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, suhmit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Manufacturer's recommended lnstallation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; on the Work. Representative, will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familrar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use a subcontractor currently approved in writing hy the manufacturer of the approved waterproofing. C. Cooperate as requlred in performance of the specified testing and Inspecting. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provalons of Sectton 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING @I BATHROOMS (ROOMS 102 AND 103) A. Where indicated an the Drawings. and where otherwise required for proper waterproofing, provide approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. "Blturhene 3000" manuiactured by W. R. Grace Co., l(800) 444-6459 or provide an equal system MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING. CMWD 07110-1 B. For protection of the insralled memhranc waterproofing, provide "Bituthene Protection System" conssting of Bltuthene protectlon huar,I PB-3000 adhered with Bltuthene protection hoard adhesive PBA-3000 applied at a rate of (250 to 350 sq ft per gal). 2.2 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING @ METAL STANDING SEAM ROOF A. Where indicated on the drawings, and where otherwise required for proper waterproofing, provide Ice and Water Shield as manufactured hy W.R. Grace Co.. l(800) 444-6459 or provide an equal system approved in advance by the Owner's Representarwe. 2.3 THRU-WALL WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Flexible, Self-Sealmg Wall Flashing: Seli-sealmg. self-healing. fully adhering. composite flexihle flashing consisting of 32 mil thick phahle and highly adhesive ruhherized asphalt compound hounded completely and integrally to 8 mil thlck. high-denslry. four plies of cross-laminated plyethylene film to producr an overall 40 mil thickness; protected from ct~ntam~narrm from dust or dirt hy a silicone-coated release sheet, to he removed ~mmrdrately before Installation. Flashing shall he Perm-A Barrier Wall Flashing hy W.R. Grace GI., l(800) 444-6459 or equal when appnwed in advance hy the Owner's Representatwe. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation. as selected by the Contractor suhject to the approval oirhe her's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACECONDITlONS A. Examine the areas and conJmons under which work d this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and pnrprr ccnnpletlon ot the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Except as may he moditlcd wrh rhc advance appn>vnl d rhr Owner's Representative, install the work of thls Section In smct accordmce wrh the rnanlli.lcnlrer'~ rcctmmendatlons. B. For memhrane waterpnndlnc XI ceramic tile Iocarlon~. insall the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer'> rec~,mmcndnrlc,ns and rhc TCA Insrallatam requirements. MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING. CMWD 07110-2 SECTION 07175 WATER REPELLENT COATINGS PART 1 ~ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide water repellent coatings at all exposed masonry block locattons and where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificarlons. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 15 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Norm to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; Representative, will hecome the hasls for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Upon completion of the work of this Section, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Owner's Representative two copies of the manufacturer's certificate required under PardLTaph 1.3-B below. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhen of skilled workmen thoroughly tralned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specifled requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Sectrm. B. Manufacturer's certification: Make requlred arrangements and pay the costs for a visit t11 the joh site hy an authomed represmtativr (~f the manufdcturer of the appmved water repellent coating, who shall inspect and certify that: 1. The surfdces to whlch the water repellent cmmg was to he applied were in proper condition to 2. The installers were pmperly trained In the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures and 3. The materials delivered [(I the joh were those approved hy the Owner's Representative for the work receive that appl~cat~on; were prepared to use the appl~carrm equipment recommended hy the manuiacturer; and of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provislons of Section 01614. 1.5 WARRANTY WATER REPELLENT COATING . CMWD 07175-1 A. Upon completion ofthe work of this Section. and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Owner's Representative two copies of a written warranty signed by the Contractor, the water repellent coating application subcontractor, and the water repellent coating manutacturer, under whlch: 1. The three parties mutually agree to maintain the water repellent coated surface free from the 2. The water repellent coating manufacturer agrees to provide water repellent coating materials as penetration of water for a period of two years following Date of Suhsrantlal Completlon; and 3. These warranty services will he provided at no additlonal cost to the Owner. required for that purpose for a period of five years following Date of Substantial Completion; and PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Where exposed masonry block is indicated on the drawings, provide 'Rainguard Blok-Lok' water repellent coating manufactured by Rainguard Products Company, or approved equal clear water repellent coating approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. B. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper insrallatinn, as selected hy the Contractor subject to the amoval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatlsfacrory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply sufficient coats of the approved material to achieve a consistent and uniform appearance, free from rum and sags, and with a uniformly resisttve surface which will prevent penetration of water through the walls for the requlred period of warranty. 3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTING A. Twenty days after completrm of thls portion of the Work. and as a condition of its acceptance. demonstrate hy running water test that the work of this Section will successfully repel water. 1. Nntlfy the Owner's Represenrdtive at least 72 hours in advance, and conduct the test in the Owner's 2. By means of an outr~gger, or slmilar acceptahle equipment, place the nozzle ofa 20 mm (3/4") Representatwe's presence. Eden hose at a pomr approxtrnarely 3 rn (lo"@) away from the tap of the wall where approved hy the Owner's Representdrlve, alming the nozzle at a slight downward angle to direcr the full stream of water Llnt(1 the wall. 3. Run the water onto the wall at full avdilahle force for not less than four hours. 4. Upon completion of the four hour period, Inspect the interior surfaces of the wall for evidence of moisture penetration. B. If evidence of moisture penetration is dwxwered, apply an additional coat of the approved water repellent to the exterior surface In areas dlrected by the Owner's Representative, repeating the application and the testlng (at no additional cost to the Owner) until no evidence of moisture penetration is found. END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENT COATING. CMWD 07175-2 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide huilding insulation where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. . Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Speciflcations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post a certificate of insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. 1.4 ENERGY CONSERVATION STANDARDS A. Certified insulation materials per energy conservation standards California Code of Regdations, Title 24 per Section 2-5311(a). B. Insularion installed to meet flame spread and smoke density requirements of energy consewation standards Califomla Gxle of Replarions, Title 24 per Section 2-5311(h) and UBC Sections 1712 and 1713. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide the following huildmg insulation where shown on the Drawings or otherwise needed to achieve jurisdictlon. the degree of insulation requlred under penlnenr regulations of governmental agencles havinC 1. Type A: 6 thick foil faced glass fiher harts wlth an Insulation only value of R-19 at all exterior wood 2. Type B: 3 M", 5 M" or 8" thick un-faced glass fiher sound isolating harts at all interior waod stud 3. Type C: 8" thick foil faced in all ceiling spaces just under sheathing above with an Insulation only stud perlmeter walk as shown on the drawlngs. Walk. value of R-30. At malntenance (room 106) provide 8" thick foil face insulation with whlte vinyl cap sheet. BUILDING INSULATION. CMWD 07210-1 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, nor specifically described hut required for a complete and proper Installation, as selected by the Contractor suhject rn the approval of the Ouner's Represenratlve. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will hr perfnrmed. Correct conditions detrunenral to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Remove, or protect against. projections in construction framing which may damage or prevent propel insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Owner's Representative, anchoring all components firmly into position. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION ~ CMWD 07210-2 SECTION 07410 PREFORMED METAL ROOFING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide preformed standing seam metal roofing system where shown on the Drawmgs, as specifled herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 071 10 - Membrane waterproofing. 3. Section 07600 - Flashing and sheet metal. Condltions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar davs after the Contractor has received the Owner's Nonce to Proceed, submit: 2. Sufficient technical data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requlrements; 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Samples, each approximately 600 mm (24") square, in as many panels as necessary to demonstrate all conditions to he encountered, and utilizing each design, type of solder, fastener. hase sheet. finish sheet. and other material required under this Section. 4. Prior to ordering products, submit Manufacturer's color samples for color selection. C. Installers qualifications. 2. Installer shall meet the followmg: 1. Installer must he approved hy the Panel Manufacturer in writing prior to work commencing. a. Successfully applled five metal roofs of comparable size and complexity which reflect a quality h. Have been In huslness for minimum period of 5 years in the region where the work will he and weathertlpht installation in the region where the work will he performed. performed. D. Manufacturer's qualiflcatims. 1. Manufacturer shal! have a minimum of 10 years experience supplying metal roofing to the region 2. Comply with current independent testing and certification as specified. 3. Manufacturer shall provide proof of liability Insurance for their metal roof system. 4. The roof panel manufacturer must also suhscrihe to Underwriters Lahoratories 'Follow Up Service' assur~ng conrlnuing product compliance with UL requirements. Shlpment packaging of panels and attachment clips must hear UL classificarion markings. where the work is to he done. E. Regulatory agency requirements. 1. Comply with Uniform Building Code and local huilding code requirements if more restrictwe than 2. Compliance with certificatwn must he suhmirted with hid. those specified herein. F. Design criteria. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING ~ CMWD 07410-1 1. The roof system manufacturer shall provide an attachment schedule or supporring calculations to reslsr uplift loads for the region a> requlred hy the Uniform Building Code. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced m the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specifled requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with requaemenrs of governmental agencies havinc jurisdiction, ct)mpl? with: 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Class A fire rating; 2. SMACNA Pertinent recommenJarl<ms contalned in the "Archltecrural Sheet Metal Manual." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's product warranty 1. Manufacturer's standard coating prdnrmance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental condlrmns. B. Contractor's warranty 1. Warrant panels. flashings. sealanrs, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, to reman watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years following project substantia^ c<mpietion dare. PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. lMSA Building Prcxlucrs. 10905 Beech Avenue. Famtana. CA 92337, (909) 823-0401. Roofing system to he IMSA 'Select Seam'. Orher manutacturer's when appnwrd in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Panels. 1. Base metals a. Material: Srrcl camiormlng ro ASThl .4924. mtnlmum ylcld 43,5OOpsi, thickness 24 gau~e. h. Protective Gwring: Zlncalumr conhvrm~ng ro ASTM A924. AZ50. a. hratech 5000. full iPb, kynar 500hylar 5000 iglr a rota1 of 1.0 mil dry film thickness with a 2. Flnish 3. Color 4. Configuration specular glcm 10-1 5 when testrd in accnrdancr wlth ASTM D-52389 at 60". a. Color to hc standard ccdc)r 'Fnresr Green.' a. Narrow harrem IC! hc I" high and 3/X" wide ar habe nf barren. B. Accessories 1. Fastener clip 2. Fasteners 3. Sealant a. UL-90 assemhly ratd clip: 24 gmge ccvated with minimum G-60 galvanized per ASTM A924. a. Per manufacturer'\ rccommendatlon. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING. CMWD 07410.2 a. Gunnahle grade calking: Single component urethane calk h. Tape sealant: Butyl C. Flashing 1. Marerial, gauge and finish to match panels. Do not use lead or copper. Remove any strippahie film prior to Installation. D. Fabrication 1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, fahricate panels in continuous one-piece 2. Roofing panels shall he factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptdhk. lengths and fahricate flashing and accessories in longest practical lengths. 3. Roofing panels and/or battens shall he field curved, as required. To dimensions shnwn on drawinp. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Suhstrate shall he installed level and true to avoid panel stresses and distortions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 8. Verify that suhsnate is sound, dry, properly sloped for drainage, and completely secured in position. C. Verify that provision has heen made for roof drains, scuppers, flashing. and all other interface items attaching to or penetrating through the work of this Section. D. Verify that memhers andlor suhstrate to receive panels are complete, accurately sized and located. in true plane, secure and otherwise properly prepared. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not allow the installed work of this Section to he used as a storage space for other materials. B. Verify all dimensions prmr tn fahricatinn. If field measurements differ from drawing dimension, notify Owner’s Representative prior tn fahrication. C. Protection 1. Treat, or isolate with protective material. any cmtracting surfaces of dissimilar materials tu prevent 2. Require workmen who will hc walking on rnoflng panels to wear ckan. soft-soled work shoes chat 3. Protect work of other trades axamst damage and dacolotdtion. electrolytic corroslon. will not pick up stones or other ahrasive material which could cause damage and discokxditon. D. Clean and dry surfaces prior tn applying sealant 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Install the work of thls Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Representative. anchoring all compnents firmly into position as a completely watertight and weathertight mscallathn. B. Panels 1. Follow roof panel manuiacturer’s directions 2. Install panel seams vertically. PREFORMED METAL ROOFING ~ CMWD 07410-3 3. Lap panels away from prevaillng wind direction. 4. Do not stretch or compress panel side-lap interlocks. 5. Secure panels without warp or deflectlon. 6. Fully engage battens. 7. Remove strippable protective film. if used, immediately preceding panel installarlon C. Allowable erection tolerance 1. Maximum alignment variation: V,” in 40 feet, D. Flashing 1. Follow manufacturer’s directions and Owner’s Representatives approved shop drawinp 2. Install flashings to allow for thermal movement. E. Cutting and fitting 1. Neat, square and true. Torch cutting is prohibited. 2. Openings 6 and larger in any direction: Shop fabricate and reinforce to malnrain original load 3. Where necessary to sawan panels, debur and treat with galvanic paint. capacity. 3.4 CLEAN UP AND CLOSE OUT A. Panel damage and finish scratches. 2. Panels or flashing that have severe paint andlor substrate damage shall he replaced as directed by the 1. Don not apply touch-up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor scratches. Owner’s Representatwe. B. Cleaning and repairing 1. At completion of each day’s work and at Work Completion, sweep panels, flashings and gurterj 2. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or mner, if directed. clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, fillings or scraps to accumulate. END OF SECTION PREFORMED METAL ROOFING. CMWD 07410-4 SECTION 07530 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide single ply memhrane roofing system and substrate where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to,. General 2. Section 01421 .Waterproofing lnspection Services. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Prnceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings detailing special joint or termination conditions, and conditions of interface with 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; other material. Representative, will become the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. The roofing contractor shall submit all required items at the time of bidding in one comprehensive package. This package includes: 1. Copies of specifications. 2. Samples of the major components of the roofing system. 4. Specimen copies of the manuiacturer's guarantee. 3. The roofing systems printed product data. 5. Dimensioned shop drawings of the roof including huilding height. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhen of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and cmnpletely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. The roofing contractor must he trained and aurhorized hy the Manufacturer to install specified roofing system. C. Upon completion ofthe installation, and after written notification to the Manufacturer shall work has been completed in strict accordance with the contract specifications and requirements, a guarantee evaluation shall he made by a representative of the Manufacturer for the purpose of determining whether the system installed meets the requirements for issuance of the Manufacturer's guarantee. D. Cooperate as required in performance of the specified inspecting and testing. SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ~ CMWD 07530-1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. B. Deliver all materials to the job site in their oripinal. tightly sealed containers or unopened packages C. All materials shall he clearly labeled with the name ofthe manufacturer and product identificatm D. All materials must he protected from damage during transit, handling. storage and installatr)n. E. All materials shall he stored in a dry area and protected from the elements. Membrane rolls shall he stored flat on pallets. F. Adhesives and curahle materlals shall he stored at temperatures ahve 50" F hut not exceeding 80" F. G. All flammable materials shall he stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions outlined in the material safety data sheets published by the Manufacturer. H. All materials determined to have been damaged shall he replaced with new materials 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacture agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures will include roof leakage. 1. Special warranty lncludes roofing membrane, base flashing, roofing memhrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, suhstrate materials, walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty period: 10 years kom date of Substantial Completion. B. Special project warranty: Submit roofing installers warranty signed by installer, covering work of this Section. including all components of membrane roofing system such as rcwfing memhrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, suhstrate materials and walkway prducts for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. Installer to suhmit warranty information in the following form and with the following information: WHEREAS, (name of company) nr (address), herln calleil the 'Roofing Installer,' has performed rnofing and associated work ('work') on the hllnwing prnject: 1. Owner: 2. Address: 3. Buildlng Name: 4. Area of Work: 5. Acceptance Date: 6. Wamnty Period: 7. Expiration Date: AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted indirectly as a suhcontractnr with the Owner to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defectlve mater& and workmanshlp fnr deslkmated Warranty Period. during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to he made such repairs to or NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer herehy warrants. suhlect to terms and conditions herein set forth. that work in a watertight condltion. replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said This warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING. CMWD 07530-2 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the huildmg. and to huilding conrents, caused hy: a. Lightning; h. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 74 mph; c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system suhsrrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection. deterioration and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents equipment supports and other f. Vapor Condensation on bottom of roofing; and edge.condirions and penetrations of the work; g. Activity on rnofing hy others, including construction contractnrs, maintenance personnel, other persons and animals whether authorized or unauthorized hy the Owner. 2. When work has been damaged hy any of hegoing causes, Warranty shall he null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been pad hy Owner nr hy 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty hut is not liahle for consequentlal another responsible party so designated. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work hy anyone other than Roofing Installer. including damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects or work. of anything on roof, this Warranty shall hecome null and void on date of said alterations, hut onlv to the cutting, patching and maintenance in connection with penetrations. atrachment or the work, and positioning extent said alterations affect work covered hy this Warranty. If Owner encages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not hecome null and void unless Roofing Installer. hefore starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, therehy reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. specified for. a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface. flded basin or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall hecome null and void on date of said change, hut only to the extent said change affects work covered hy this Warranty. and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examining evidence of 7. This Warranty is recognized to he the only Warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to such leaks, defects or deterioration. restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resnurces lawfully availahle to Owner in cases or roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance or original work accordmg to requirements of the Contract Documents. reL%ardiess of whether Contract was a contract drectly with Owner or a suhcontracr with Owner's General cilntractor. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, hut was not originally 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing lnstaller or ohserved known or suspected leaks, defects or deterioration year). IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has heen duly executed this (insert day) day of (insert month), ZO(insert 2. Printed name: 1. Authorized signature: 3. Title: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM A. Prnvlde fabric-reinforced PIB thermoplastic sheet as manufactured hy Tremao, Inc, 3735 Green Road, advance hy the Owner's Representative. Membrane roofing system to have the following minimum Beechwod. Ohio 44122 (216) 292.5000 or equal systems hy other manufacturers when approved in attributes: 1. Thickness: 120 mils nominal 3. Breaking strength: 1751hs; ASTM D 751, ph method 2. Exposed face color: White 4. Elongation at break: 60-100 percent; ASTM D 751 SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING. CMWD 07530-3 5. Tearing strength: 251hs minimum; ASm D 751, tonpe tear 6. Br~rtleness pomt: Minus 22 den F 8. Water ahsorption: Less than 4% ma55 change after 166 hours ~mmenion at 158 dec F: ASTM D 471 7. Ozone resistance: Bent loop. nc crxks at 2X mapification; ASTM D 1149 2.2 BASE SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Sheet: Trilaminate reinfinced ply sheet, complymg with ASTM D 4601-91; ASTM 228-90A and ASTM 146-90. 2.3 SUBSTRATE MATERIALS A. Suhstrate material: 1 layer high density w(xd fiber hoard w~th nonasphahc h~nders as manufactured hy Celotex over 1 layer M" Denns Deck as shown on the drawings. lnsulation board shall he comparihle with roofing membranes. B. Fasteners: Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for iastening suhstrdte panel to roof deck. 2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofing asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type I11 B. Asphalt primer: ASTM L) 41 2.5 WALKWAYS A. Flexihle walkways: Factorv-f<)rrned. nnnponws, heavy duty. solid ruhher, slip resisting, surface textured walkway pads, approximatdy 3/16 th& and aCCeptdhk rn memhrane roofing manufacturer. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A, B. C. D. E. F. General: Auxil~ary matem15 reccmmended hy rwt~nl: system nmanufacrurer for intended use and compatible w~th memhrane nr41nK. 1. L~quid type auxillarv m;wrd shall meer VCX lmlrh <~fauthorities having jurisdiction. Sheet flashmg: Manuiacrurcr'~ mnhJ sheer tlashlnc cri.wne material. type, reinforcement, and color as PIB sheet memhrdne. Bonding sdhes~ves: h4mufxr11rcr'~ srandard xhent hard hcdmg adhesive for memhrane and snlvent based IwnJ~ng adhem.c h>r haw tl~sh~n~s. approximately 1" x 1/R" thick wnh anchnrs. Metdl rermination harx h4an11t,1~11rer's srandarJ predrilled m~nless steel or aluminum hars. Fasteners: Factory coared .*reel tawners and mural 'Ir plasr~c plares meetinl: corrosion res~stance provisions in FMG 447C. JL.SICIIL.LI lor tastrn~n~ mrmhranc r<> suhstrare and acceptahle to memhrane rnnfinl: sysrem manutacrurcr. M~scellaneous access(lrles: I'nwdr prurahle xalers. preiorrned cnne and vent sheer flashing, preformed inside and outside corner shwr Ilnshlng. T-imnr cuvers, tcrm~nation reglets, cover strips and other accrssories. PART 3 . EXECUTION SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING. CMWD 07530-4 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions for compliance wlth the followlng requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are 2. Verify that wood blocking, curhs and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penerratinns and 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. securely clamped m place. terminations and that nailers match thickness' of insulatlon. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, dehris, moisture and other substances detrimental tn rwfing Installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instruction. Remove all sharp pro~ect~ons. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or mipting onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof drain plugs when no work is raking place or when ram is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashing and provide temporary seals to prevent water frnm entering completed sectlons of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install suhstrate hoard with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular tn roof slopes with end joints staggered heween rows. Tightly bun suhstrate hoards together. 1. Fasten suhstrate hoard to wood deck to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers written instructions. 3.4 BASE SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install one lapped course of base sheet according to roofing system manufactures written instructions, extending sheet over and terminatlng beyond cants. 8. Adhere to suhstrate in a solid mopping of hot rmfing asphalt. 3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. install roofing memhrdne over area to receive roofing according to memhrane roofing system manufxturers wrltten instructions. Unroll rndln~ memhrane and allow tn relax hefnre installing. B. Start installaram 11f roofing membrane in presence nf membrane roofing system manufacturers technical represenratwe. c. Accurately a1i.p ronfing memhranr and malntaln uniform side and end laps of minimum dlmensions required by manufacture. Stagger end laps. D. Hot roofing asphalt: Apply a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt to suhstrate at temperature and rate required by manuiacturer and install fahrlc hacked mof~ng membrane. nor apply rnofing asphalt to spllce area of roofing membrane. E. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ~ CMWD 07530-5 G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing memhrane and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufactures wntten insrructmns to ensure a Watertight seam inscallation. 1. Test lap edges with prohe to vert6 seam weld cnnrinuity. Apply lap sealant tn seal cut edges of 2. Verlfy field srrengrh of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids and lapped seams in roofing memhrane that does not meet requirements. roofing memhrane. H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing rnembrdnr in place with clampmg ring. 1. Install roofing memhrane and other materials to tie into existing roofing 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashing and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates accordmg to membrane roofing system manufacturers written instructions. B. Apply solvent hased bonding adhesive to suhstrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field formed inside and outside comers with sheet flashing D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashing and mechanically anchor to suhstrate through termination bars. 3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexihle walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to suhstrate or adhere written Instructions. walkway products to substrate with cornpatihle adhesive according to roofing system manufacturers 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to perfnrm roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Flnal ronfing inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturers technical representative to inspect roofing installation on completion and submn revm to the Owner's Representative. 1. Nntify the Owner and the Owner's Represenratlve 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. c. Repdlr or remnve and replace compnnenrs of memhrane rnofing system where test results or Inspections lndlcate that they do not comply wlth specitled requmments. L). Addirlunal restmg and inspectlng will he performed to determine compliance of replaced nr additional work with specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect memhrane rnofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaming construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, descrihing its nature and extent in a wrltten report with copies to the Owner and the Ownerh Represenratlve. SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ~ CMWD 07530-6 B. Correct deficiencies in or remove memhrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repar or reinstall memhrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at ttme of Suhstantial Completion and accordtng to warranty requirements. C. Clean over spray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended hy manufacturer or affected construction. END OF SECTION SINGLE PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING ~ CMWD 07530-7 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 ~ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide flashing and sheet meral not specifically descrihed in other Sections of these Specifcations hut required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the huilding. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General 2. Section 07920 -Sealants and calking. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. suhmit: 2. Manufacturer's Specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of item proposed to be provided under this Section; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fahrication, installation, anchorage. and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; Representative, will become the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complyinC with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contamed in current edmm of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published hy the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Associatam (SMACNA). C. Standard commercial items may he used for flashinr, trim, reglets, and similar purposes provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDHANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Sectlon 01614 PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND GAGES FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. CMWD 07600-1 A. Where sheet metal is required. and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide the highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards. 2.2 GALVANIZED IRON A. Provide sheet metal or sheer Iron of a standard brand of open-hearth copper-hearing steel, copper- molybdenum iron, or pure Iron sheets. B. Zinc coatlng: 1. Where galvanizing is requlred, pnn+Jc zinc cmaring hy hot-dip galvanize to all surfaces. 2. Weight: a. Provide not less than 35.4 per sq 300 mm (1-114 oz per sq it). nor more than 42.5 g per sq 300 mm (1-1/2 (1: per sq it), ro surfaces requlred to he galvanized. 3. Comply with ASTM A123.64. 2.3 NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS A. Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated screws and washers in connection with Kalvanlzell Iron and steel. 2.4 FLUX A. Where flux is required. use raw muriatic ac~d. 2.5 SOLDER A. Where solder is required. comply with ASTM B32. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, nut specifically deacrihed hut required for a complete and proper installarlon. as selected hy the Contractor auhlect tc1 the appn~val c~ithr Owner's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and c(udIIIon' under whlch w>rk dthl> Section will he performed Correct conditions detrmenral to timely anJ pr~qw c<nnpletam td rhc Work. Lk) nor proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. General: 1. Form sheet metal accmdv mJ to the dlmenslon~ and shapes requlred. finishing molded and hroken suriaces wlth rrw. hrp. and strachr he, anJ nnples and, where Interceptin): other memhera. coplng t,l an auuritre ilr and bc,lderrng aecureiy. 2. Unless otherwise specdIally permltred hy thr Chvner'a Representatwe, turn exposed edges hack 13 mm (112"). B. Form, fabricate. and ~nsrall sheer meral so as tu adequately provide for expansion and contraction in the finished Work. C. Weatherproofing: 1. Finish watertight and wearhertlght where S(I requlred. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. CMWD 07600-2 2. Make lock seam work flat and me to line, sweating full of solder. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch. hut In no case less than 75 mm (3"). 3. Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered. at least 13 mm (1/2") wide. 5. Make flat and lap seam in the direction of flow. D. Joints: 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 12.19 m (4@-@). except whrrr 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and stifiness. closer spacing IS indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation. E. Nailing: 1. Whenever possihle, secure metal hy mews of clips or cleats, without nailing thrnugh the exterior 2. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws nor more than 200 mm (8") apart and. where exposed to 3. For nailing into wood, use harhed roofing nails 31 mm (1-1/4'') long by 11 gage. 4. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs. metal. the weather, use lead washers. 3.3 EMBEDMENT A. Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and methods descrihed in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and methods approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 3.4 SOLDERING A. General: 1. Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering. 2. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper. in order to heat the seams thoroughly and to 4. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces near. full flowing, and smooth. 3. Perform soldering with a heavy soldermg copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use. completely fill them with solder. B. After soldering. thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solur~on 3.5 TESTS A. Upon request of the Owner's Representative, demnnsrrate hy hose or standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are completely warertlehr. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. CMWD 07600-3 SECTION 07920 SEALANTS AND CALKING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Throughout the Work, seal and calk joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as required to provide a posltive harrier against passage of moisture and passage of alr. B. Related work 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditmns, and Sections in Dlvision I of these Specif~cations. 1.2 SUBMIlTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; Representative, will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejectmg actual insrallation procedures used on the Work. C. Samples: Upon request of the Owner's Representative, submit Samples of each sealant. each hacking material, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to he used. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thorouehly trained and experienced In the necessary crafts and completely familtar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provlsinns of Section 01614. B. Ih not retain at the joh site mdterldl which has exceeded the shelf lifcrecommended hy 11s manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Provlde the following sealants. or equals approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative, where called for on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and proper installation. 1. Sealant Type A (at joints subjected to horizontal traffic): a. Self-leveling, complying with ASTM C920-79, grade P, class 25; h. Acceptahle products: SEALANTS AND CALKING - CMWD 07920-1 (1) "Vulkem 45, one-part;" (2) "Vulkem 245, two-part;" 2. Sealant Type B (at joints suhject to exrreme movement): a. Non-sag, complying with ASTM C920-79, type S, grade NS. class 25, use NT, M. A. and 0; h. Acceptahle products: ( 1 ) "Vulkem 116, one-part;" (2) "VulkemY21. one-pan;" 3. Sealant Type C (at ~oints requiring acoustical separation): h. Acceptahle products: a. Acoustical sealant; (1) "W. W. Henry's 313;" (2) "W. W. Henry's 413;" 4. Sealant Type D (at joints not listed above): a. Acryllc latex, complying with ASTM (2834-76; h. Acceptahle products: ( 1 ) "Pecora AC 20." B. For other services, except as may he called for on the Drawings, provide products especially formulated for the proposed use and approved in advance hy the Owner's Representatwe. c. colors: 1. Colors for each sealant installation will he selected hy the Owner's Representative from standard 2. Should such standard color not he available from an approved substitute manufacturer except at 3. In concealed installations. and in partially or fully exposed insrallations where so approved hy the colors normally available from the specified manufacturer. additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the Owner. Owner's Representative, use standard gray or black sealant. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Use only those primers which have been tested for durahility on the surfaces to he sealed and are specifically recommended for this installation hy the manufacturer of the sealant used. 2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS A. Use only those hackup materials whlch are nnn-ahrorhent. non-staining. and specifically recommenJed for this lnsrallation by the manufacturer of the sealant used. 2.4 MASKING TAPE A. Fnr masklng around jnlnts. pr~~vlde an approprvate masklnc tape which will effectively prevent applicatinn of sealant on surfaces not scheduled recelve It, and which IS remnvahle without damage to substrate. 2.5 OTHER MATERlALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut requlred for a complete and proper insrallation, as selected hy the Conrractnr suhlect to the apprnvdl(~f the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A: Examine the areas and conditlons under which work of thls Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. SEALANTS AND CALKING. CMWD 07920-2 3.2 PREPARATION A. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces: 2. At open joints, remove dust hy mechanically hlown compressed air if so requlred. 1. Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free from dust. 4. Where surfaces have heen treated, remove the surface rrearment hy sandblasting or wlre hrushing. 3. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire hmshing. 5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities. B. Steel surfaces: 1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant: a. Sandblast as required tu achieve acceptable sudace for hond. h. If sandblasting 1s not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the metal or wire hrush c. Use solvent tu remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white raps only. to remove mill scale and rust. 2. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or hy using a solvent which leaves no residue. C. Aluminum surfaces: 1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant: a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease. h. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape just prior to applylng the sealant. 2. Use only such solvencs to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that purpose hy the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non-stdininE. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL A. When using hackup of tuhe or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do not twist or hraid hose or rod backup stock. B. Installation tool: 1. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt-surfaced tool of wood or plastic, havinz shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished surface and a protrusion of the requlred dimensions to assure uniform depth of hackup material helow the sealant. 2. Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdrlver or similar tool for this purpose. 3. Using the apprvved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the hackup material to the depth Indicated on the Drawings or utherwise required, compressing the hackup mdterldl25% to 50% and securing a posltive fit. 3.4 PRIMING A. Use only the primer approved hy the Owner's Representative for the particular installation. applying in strict accordance wlth the manufacturer's recommendatlons as approved hy the Owner's Representative. 3.5 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION A. Provide an approved hond-hreaker where rrcommended hy the manufacturer of the sealant. and where directed hy the Owner's Representative, adhering strlcrly to the manufacturers' installation recommendations. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. Prior to start of installation in each jomt, verify the joint type according to details on the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative, and verify that the required proportion of width of jvint to depth of joint has heen secured. SEALANTS AND CALKING ~ CMWD 07920-3 B. Equipment: 1. Apply sealant under pressure with pc>wer-actuated hand gun or manuallyoperated hand gun. or hy ~~ 2. Use guns with nozzle of proper SIX. and providmg sufficient pressure to completely fill the jolnts as other appropriate means. designed. C. Thoroughly and completely mask jomr. where the appearance of primer or sealant on adjacenr sudaces would he ohjectionahle. D. Install the sealant in stricr accordance wlrh the manutacturer's recommendatlons. thoroughly filling joints to the recommended deprh. E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Lhawings, or as otherwise required if such profiles are nor shown on the Drawings. 1. Provide uniformly smoorh pints with slightly concave surface. 2. Do not use tooling agenr unless specifically so recommended in writing by the manufacturer of the sealant. F. Cleaning up: 2. Clean adjacent suriaces free from sealant as the lnstallation progresses, using solvent or cleaning 1. Remove masking rape immediately after joints have been tooled. agenr recommended hy rhe rnanufxrurer of the sealant used. 3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the joh site all debris. empty contalners, and surplus material derived from this portion of the Work. END OF SECTION SEALANTS AND CALKING . CMWD 07YZO-4 Division 08 Doors and Windows SECTION 081 10 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide metal door and metal door frames, which are nor specifically described in other Sectv~ns of these Specifications, where shown on the Drawmgs. as specified hereln, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Doccuments affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 08710 . Finish hardware. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 3. Sectlon 09900. Painting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submlt: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 3. Shop Drawings showing detaik of each frame type, elevations of door designs, derails of openines, and 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; de-tails of consrmction, installation, and anchorage; Representative. will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thornughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified rrqulremenrs and methods needed for proper performance of the work ofthis Srction. B. Unless specifically otherwise approvrd by thr Owner's Reprrsentative. provide all prnducts of this Section from a single manufacturer. c. Comply wlth pertinent recommendarlons of the Hollnw Metal Manufacturers' Association, Srandard HMMA 861. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Srction 01614. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DOORS METAL DOORS AND FRAMES - CMWD 08110-1 A. provide in the dimensions and types sh<wn on the Drawings, and with the following atnihures: I. Face sheers: a. Interlor dwrs: 18 page; 2. Minimum rhichess: 1-3/4; h. Exterior doors: 16 gaxe, hot-dtp XalvanizeJ; 3. Stifieners: Two @ 22 page; 4. Vertical edges: Contmuou> weld; 5. Top and hottom edges: Closed with 16 gage continuous recessed steei channel, spot-welded to face 6. Glass mouldings and stops: sheets; a. Fixed mouldings welded to do,r on securlry side; h. hse stops: 20 pdxe; 7. Louvers: Welded blade-rype construction; with replaceable metal screen at exterior doors. B. At the factory, pre-clean and shop prime rdch door for finish painting which will he performed at the ]oh site under Section 09900 of these Speciflcarlons. C. Acceptable products: 1. As manufactured hy Krieger Steel Prtlducts Co., 4896 Greg Road, Pic0 Rivera. CA 90660 (213) 695- 0645; 2. Equal products of Amweld and Ceco are also acceptdhle. 2.2 METAL FRAMES A. Acceptable products: See ParaLTaph 2.1 -C ahove B. Provide in the dimensions and types shown on the bdwlngs, and with the following attrihutes: 1. For interior openings: a. For openings 4°C" w~de or less: 16 page; 2. For exterior openinp: 14 gage. hot-dlp galvanized; h. For openings more than 4'0 w~de: 14 pace; 3. Construction: Welded unxr5. with lntegrd slop end rrlrn; 4. Floor anchors: 14 paw. welded msde lamhs; 5. Jamh anchors: a. In masonry wallh. pnr\-& wlrh 0.156'' rhlck wlrc-rype or with adjustable 16 gage T-snap not less h. In stud partlrlgm>. pnwldc 18 rage steel itnchc~rr wrldrd Inside jamhs; than 2" x I@; 6. hst covers: 26 page. where raqulred; 7. Loose glazing stops a. Exterlor openlnp 2@ UACC ccAl-rolled brvel; h. For interlclr openlnr\: Snap-tm glazing 5rop C. At the factory, pre-clran and >hop prune each frame for imh pamrlng which will he performed at the joh site under Section 099oC of thew $wclhcdt1nns. 2.3 FINISH HARDWARE A. Secure templates frtm the flnlrh hardware suppller, and accurately install, or make provision for, all finish hardware at the 6dctory. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS htETAL DOORS AND FRAMES. CMWD 081 10-2 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and pmper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condlrlons are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Placing frames: 1. Where practicable, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. Set frames accurately into position. plumhed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are 3. After wall construction IS completed. remove temporary hraces and spreaders, leaving suhdces smonth 4. At in-place construction, set frames and secure to adpcenr construction with machine screws and set. and un-damaged. suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z fillers at rach screw location. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Final adjustments: 2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. 1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final mnspection. 3. Remove defective work and replace with work complymg with the specified requirements. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION METAL DOORS AND FRAMES. CMWD 081 10-3 SECTION 08122 ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide aluminum door and wlndow frames where shown on the Drawings, as specified hereln. and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of thls Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 3. Section 08800 ~ Glazing. 2. Section 08710 . Finish hardware. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Speclfcations. 1.2 SUBMIlTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Prnduct data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, suhmit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation. anchorage, and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; Representative, will become the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Samples: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, suhmit: 1. Sample of each exposed memher. 2. Samples of finish, showing complete range of color from darkest to lightest proposed for use on this Work. Samples, when approved hy the Owner's Representatwe, will he used tn veri6 that finish actually furnished is wlthin the approved range. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thnrm~ghly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely famillar wlth the specified requlrements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Manufacturer: Company specialinng in manufacturing ofdnnr frame and glazing systems with a minimum of ten continuous years of documented experlence. C. Installer: Company with a minimum of five years documented experience in the installation of interior alummum dwr frames. apprnved by the manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES - CMWD 08122-1 1.5 WARRANTY A. Upon completmn of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance. deliver to the Owner's Representatlve two copies of a written Warranty apreelng to replace work of this Section whlch fads due to defective materials or workmanshlp wirhln three years after Date of Suhstantidl Completion as that Date is determined in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, hut not tn he llmited to: 1. Failures in operation of operating component or components; 2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standards; 3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visihle tn the unaided eve; 4. Defects which conrrihure to unsightly appearance. potential safety hazard, or potential untimely failure of the work of this Section or the Work as a whole. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Aluminum door frames and window units shall he manufactured by Wilson Partitions. 2321 South Yates, Commerce, CA 90040 (213) 721-4663 series 1400 or equals when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. B. Materials 1. Aluminum members: All component shapes shall he extruded from controlled alloy hillers of 6063 2. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, stamless steel or other noncorrosive materials which are T5 or 6463 T5 complying with ASTM B 221. compatible with aluminum components. hardware, and anchors in accordance with ASTM A 164- 71. 3. Glazing gaskets: Glazing gasket shall he a roll in vinyl. C. General construction requirements 1. Door frames: Aluminum comwmenrs shall have a flat profile. These components will he formed from a minimum of 0.062" thick aluminum cmsist~ng of a head section, two jam sections, two corner alumlnum reinfnrcmp angles, three hlnge backup plates with a minimum thickness of 0.125" and vinyl or mohair door mute. no pn~jecting stnps. 2. Glanng frames: Ofa profile to match the door frames. providing a center glazing appearance. with 1). Flnishes 1. Exposed surfaces nf kames shall he factnry ftnlshed. Flnish shall he a Duranar polyester powder coat. Color to he UC43359 'Cdonial Blue.' E. Aluminum doors to he Wilwn Partlrlon SIX Ilght door with heveled stop. Ghr to match aluminum door and wlndow frames. Lhor to he pnrvded for hy suppller of aluminum door and window frames. PART 3 . EXECUTiON 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A.' Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES. CMWD 08122-2 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provlslon In the work ofthose trades for Interface with the work ofthis Section. B. Make measurements as required in the field to assure proper fit 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original deslm, the approved Shop recommended installation procedures as approved hy the Owner's Representative. anchoring all Drawings, pertlnent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdlction. and the manufacturer's components flrmly Into positlon for long life under hard use. B. Contractor shall protect all work of this section until completion and final acceptance C. When glazing is performed under this Section, provide the types of glass required and glaze in accordance with pertinent provisions of Section 08800 of these Specifications. D. Wash all soiled surfaces with mild soap solution, rinse with clear water and wipe dry. Do not use any harsh cleaning agents, abrasives or caustics for cleaning. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FEMMES - CMWD 08122-3 SECTION 08213 PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide plastic faced wood doors, complete in place with finish hardware installed. where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complere and proper installanon. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 06240 - Plastic laminate 3. Section 08710 -Finish hardware Conditlons, Supplementary Conditions, and Secrions in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and orher data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Samples, approximately 200 mm x 200 mm (8" x 8") in size, of each of the proposed door face requirements; materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly tralned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar wirh the specified requiremenrs and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with perrinent cdes and regulations of governmental agencles having jurisdlction. comply with: 1. "Manual of Millwork" of the Woodwork lnstltute ofCalifornia, for the Lvade or grades specified; or 2. "Archltcctura~ Wocdwork Qualtry Standards" of the Archttectural Woodwork Institure, for the 3. Certlficarlon and sramps will not he requlrrd. Fade or &vades speclhed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. B. Delivery: 1. Deliver doors to site after plaster and cement are dry, and after the huildlng has reached average 2. Deliver prefinished doors in manufacturers' original containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's prevailing humldity of Its klCdllty. name. brand name, SIX. thickness. and identifying symbol on the covering. C. Storage: PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS ~ CMWD 08213-1 2. Under bottom door and over top of stack. provide plywood or cormgated cardboard to protect door 1. Stack flat on 50 mm x 100 mm (2" x 4") lumber. laid 300 mm (12") from ends and across center. 3. Store doors m area where there will be no great variations in heat, dryness. and humidlry. suriaces. D. Lift doors and carry them into position. Do not drag doors across one another PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMINATED PLASTIC FACED DOORS A. Provide laminated plastic faced dwrs of the types, designs, and thicknesses shown on the Door Schedule in the Drawings, labeled or non-laheled as indicated and as required, and Ln solid cnre or hollow cnre as shown on the Door Schedule. B. Except as may he shown otherwise on the Drawings, fabricate the work of this Section to "custom grade" of the referenced organization. C. Faces: 1. On hoth faces, provide 3 mm (1/8") thick "Dor-Surf' manufactured by Wilsonart Division of Ralph Wilson Plastics, or an equal approved in advance by the Owner's Representative, in cokm and pattems selected by the Owner's Representative from all available colors and patterns of the approved laminared plastics manufacturer. advance by the Owner's Representative, provide prefinished hardwood. fitting. 2. On hoth vertical edges, provide marching laminated plastic or, when specifically approved in 3. On tops and bottoms of doors, provide a psitive sealer applied afrer completion of machining and PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDlTlONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions denimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fitting and machining laminated plastic faced doors: 1. Using measurements nhtatned in the tleld trorn installed frames, machine rhe dwrs at the factory to 2. Replace or rehang dwrs which are hingehound and Jo not swing or operate freely. fit the prescribed frames with proper clearance at top, bottom, and vertical edges. B. Finish hardware: 1. Rece~ve and retain custody of finish hardware furnished under Section 08710 of these Specifications 2. Except as otherwise directed hy the Owner's Representative. install finish hardware in accordance hr the work of this Section. wlrh its manufacturers' recommendarlons. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Upon completion of the installation. inspect each component. I. Verify that each item has been fabricated and installed in accordance with the specified requirements. PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS. CMWD 08213-2 2. Make necessary adjustments. 3. Touchup as necessary to make surface hlemishes permanently invisihle to the unaided eve from a disrance of fwe feet. 3.4 COMPLIANCE A. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has heen performed In accordance with the specified standards. B. In the event such inspection determines the work of this Section does not comply with the specified requlrements. immediately remove the non-complying items and replace them with items complyinC with of the inspection. the specified requirements. all at no additional cost to the Owner, and remhurse the Owner for the cost END OF SECTION PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS. CMWD 08213.3 SECTION 0833 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide overhead motor driven overhead coiling doors where shown on the hawlngs, as specifled here~n, and as needed for a complete and proper mstallation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditlons, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMIlTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of item proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specifled 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation. anchorage. and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; work of ths Section with the work of adjacent trades; procedures used on the Work. Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejectlng actual installation 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Exterior rolling service doors shall he designed to withstand minimum 20 pounds per square foot wlndhad. C. All rolling service dwrs shall he designed to a standard maximum of 25 cycles per day and an overall waxmum of 50,ooO operating cycles for the life of the door. D. The color finish system shall be such that there is no corrosion when the material is sub~ected to salt spray resistance test ASTM B-117 for loo0 hours. E. Overhead coiling door to he Installed hy an authorized installer of the Manu6dcturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provlsions of Section 01614 PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS OVERHEAD COILING DOORS. CMWD 08331-1 2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS A. Acceptable products: 1. Type 'FCM' standard motor oper;treJ helt driven overhead rolling coiling door as manutactured hy 2. Equal products of other manufacturers when approved m advance hy the Owner's Designated the Cookson Company, 15717 Texaco Avenue, Paramount, California 90723, (310) 531-2576. Representative. B. Materials: 1. The door curtain shall he consrrucred of Interconnected strip steel slats conforming to ASTM A- 526. 20 gauge wlth a numher 5 (measuring 2 %" high x 5/8" deep) flat slat as manutactured hy Cooksnn Company. thermosetting polyurethane powder coaing applled with a minimum thickness of 0.2 mils. Color to 3. The bottom har shall consist of two 1/8" sreel angles mechanically joined together and shall include be custom color to match Effco alumlnum window frames 'Military Blue.' the Cookson Fearherrd Safety System. The finish nn the bottom har shall he Cooksnn ColorCote 4. The guides shall cnnslst of 3 steel angles holted together with 3/8" fasteners to form a channel for system to match door curtain. the curtain to travel and shall include an extruded vinyl snapon weather-snipping continuously surrounding structure with either mintmum K" iasteners or welds, both on 36" centers. The finish along the exterior Ier: nf the guide. The wall angle portion shall he continuous and hstened to the on the guide angle, shall he the Gn~kson CoIorCote system to match door curtain. 5. The hrackets shall he cnnstructed nf steel not less than %" thick and shall he hnlted to the wall angle with minimum %" fasteners. The finish on the brackets shall he the Cookson CoIorCnte 6. The harrel shall he steel tuhing oinor less than 4" In diameter. Oil tempered torsion springs shall he system to match Joor currams. capahle of correctly counter halancmc the weight nf the currain. The hanel shall he desrgned to limit the maximum deflecrion to 0.03" per twr niopening width. The springs shall he adlusted by means of an exrerlirr wheel. The ilnish <m the harrel shall he one (1) coat of hronre rust-inhibitive 2. The finish on the docx curtam shall he Cooksnn CdorCnte. Finish to he iactory applled 7. The hood shall he tahrlcared trom 24 gauge calvanlzd steel and shall he formed to fit the curvature prime paint. of the hrackets. The ho<d shall he corm~arecl ever\ I" along the curvature for the entire length of the hood. The h,xd sh;dl cc>ntaln a warerpn><ll canv.11 haffle to control air infiltration. The finish on the hood shall he rhc G~hm C<hG)te syrtem 1,) match dmr curtam. C. Operation 1. The dnor shall he cqwr;trrJ at a sped (1f 213 farx per \ecmd hy an open dripproof electric motor wlth helt drive and rider cham sprocket reducer. Thc Inutnr operatnr shall include a grated limit swlrch. and an elcctrlc,tll\ Inrcrkxked emergency cham l~peratm. The motor starter shall he housed In a NEMA 1 hcmlng ad Include a marnerlc revrrmg starter SIX 1. a 24 vdt conrrol transformer and complere remmal rrrlp 1,) lacil!tare IlrlJ wlrlng. The mntnr operator shall he actlvated hy a 3 hutton push-hurttm satltm In a NEMA 1 enclosure. The motor shall he sire as required hy the dcmr and IS the respms~h~l~rv c>t rhe overhead dc><>r manuidsrurer.. The motor operator shall he mc~unted tu the dmr hracket a.* h,an {m the drawrnri. All mcmlr (lperdtors shall he UL listed. a. The Featheredre .*hall he Installed on the httcm har nf the door and shall automatically the Cooksnn Cornpanv and >hall include rhc folhnvmr: fratures: reverse the Jm>r ~t rhc Jcvlce derecrh an ohsrructl<m In the downward travrl of the dnor. h. The Featheredge bhall c<,nslst of a ruhher hoot artached helow the hottom har with an electrical swlrch secured to the hack (>f the hottom har. The Featheredge shall operate with air properly. The Featheredge shall create an alr wave that shall he detected and reverse the wave technolorr\. and shall not rely on pneumatlc pressure nr electrical strip confacts to operate direction of the rthg chxrr. 2. The serwce dcrx shall mcldc the Feathrrcdce rtdhnx door salety ellee system as manufactured hy c. The operar~m oi the Fratheredge shall not he suhlect to interference hy temperature, OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ~ CMWD 08331-2 barometric pressure, water infilrration or cuts in the rubber hoot. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut requtred for a complete and prnper installatlon, as selected hy the Contractor suhjecr to the approval of the Owner's Desipated Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work ofthis Section will he periormed. Correct condltrlns detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsarlsfactnry condltlons are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work nfthose trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved hy the Owner's Designated Representative. anchorlng all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. C. Upn completion of the installation. put all items through at least ten operating cycles. Make required adjustments and assure that components are in optimum operating condition. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Coiling roll up door shall he warranted for a period of twelve (12) months from the time of suhstantial completion against defects in workmanship and materials. END OF SECTION OVERHEAD COILING DOORS - CMWD 08331-3 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are nor necessardy limited to. G.eneral 2. Section 08710 -Finish hardware. 3. Section 08800 -Glazing Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. All required test reports and warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary performance of the work of this Sectmn. crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper B. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories cerrihing the performance as specified in pdrdpdph 1.5. C. Test reports shall be accompanied hy the storefront manufacturer's letter of certifications stating that the tested storefront meets or exceeds the referenced criterra for the appropriate ANSI/AAMA 101-88 stnrefrnnt type. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Sectinn 01614. 1.5 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE A. Test units ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ~ CMWD 08410-1 1. Air water and structural test unlr me and configurations shall conform to requlrements set forth in ANSI/AAMA 101-86. B. Test procedures and performances 1. Storefront shall conform to all ANSl/AAMA 101-88 requirements for the storefront type referenced. 2. Air Infiltration test a. Test unit in accordance wlth ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference oi6.24 psf. h. Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfrn per square foot of fixed wall area. a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331/ASTM E 547 at a static air pressure difference (d h. There shall he no uncontrolled water leakage. a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E330 with a static pressure of 2Opsf positive and negative h. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 of the clear span. a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM 330 at a pressure difference of 1.5 times the design h. At conclusion of test there shall he no glass breakage. permanent damage to fasteners. 3. Water resistance test 12.00 psi. 4. Uniform load deflection wlnd pressure normal to the plane of the wall. 5. Uniform load structural test pressure for Uniform Load Deflection. storefront parts, nor any other damage, which would cause the storefront to he defective. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Total storefront system 1. Warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total storefront installation. including hut flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and not limited to the glass (including insulating units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, seallng. approved shop drawings. expense during the warranty period. 2. Correct any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications at Contractor’s sole PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMlNUM ENTRANCES A. Provide aluminum entrances in the dlmenslons and arranCements shown on the Drawings. Drawings and Specifications are based on EFCO Series 500 wide stile doors. Other acceptahle products would he Kawneer or equal when approved In advance hy the Owner’s Representat~ve. Doors shall have the following mlnimum attrihutrs: 1. Extruded alummum shall he 6@63-T5 or T6 alloy and temper as required. 2. All exposed fasteners shall he alummum (11 stainless steel. B. Major portlons of the dwr sectwns shall have ,125” wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall have ,050” wall thickness. C. Door glazing stops shall he snap-in type with elasromerlc raskets D. hr stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed reinforcement brackets shall he secured with screws and shall he deep penetration and fillet welded. All doors shall have an adjusting mechanism in the top rail to provide for mmor clearance ad~ustrnents. E. Weatherstripping shall he wool pile and shall he installed in on stile of pairs of doors. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS. CMWD 08410.2 F. Provide huilt-in astragal at pairs of doors. G. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum entrances and components with factory applied ‘Vitrasil’ silicone- polyester coating. Color IS to he EFCO standard color ‘Milltar). Blue.’ H. Finish hardware: 1. Prepare for, receive and install the finish hardware furnished under Section 08710 of these 2. Procedures: specifications. a. Perform all fltting of finish hardware to doors and frames at the &tory; except do not drill or h. Comply with finish hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. c. Use concealed fasteners to the maximum extent practicable. rap for surface mounted items until time ot installation at the sire. 2.2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS A. All aluminum storefronts are hased on EFCO 5402 flush glazed storefront system. Other acceptable products would he Kawneer or equal when approved in advance hy the Owner’s Repwsentanve. System shall have the following minimum attributes: 2. Wearherstripping: Primary weathentrips shall he hy Schlegel, Finseal or approved equal. 1. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum shall he 6063 T5 or T6 alloy and temper as required. 3. Glass and glazing: a. Storefront manufacturer shall furnish glass insulated units and factory glaze all storefronts. h. Insulated glass units shall consist of %” thick solargrey glass on the outhoard lite. %” air space, Field glazing is nor permitted, and %” thick clear tempered glass on the inhoard lite for a total 1” thick unit. All insulated glass units shall he manufactured with warm edge technolow. 2.3 FABRICATION A. B. C. D. General 2. All exposed work shall he such that raw edges will not he visihle at joints. 1. All aluminum frame extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of ,080” Frame 1. Depth of frame shall not he less than 4 M” 3. Frame components shall he screw spline construction 2. Face dimension shall not he less than 2”. Glazing 1. All units shall he ‘dry’ glazed with EPDM rasket on hth exterior and interior. Finish 1. Anodic: Flnish all exposed areas of aluminum storefront and components in the facility of the A41 607.1 AAMA. Color shall he ‘Vitrasil’ silicone polyester coating EFCO standard color ’Military manufacturer wlth color In accordance with Alumlnum Association Desipation AA-MlO-CZ2- Blue.’ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ~ CMWD 08410-3 8. Verify that openings are dimensionalii ulrhin allowahle tolerances. plum. level. clean, provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordancc \nth approved shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. Install the work of this Sectlon In strIcr accordance with the manufacturer's recommendat~ons as approved by the Owner's Representatlvc, anchoring all units firmly into positlon square, plumh, straight, and true. distortion. Check weather-strlpplnl: cnntact and hardwdre movement and make final adjustment tor Entrance doors shall he securely anchclreJ In place ro a straight. plumh and level condition, without proper operation and performance oiunlrs. Furnish and apply sealing materials tu provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersection and at opening perimeters. Use sealing materials specified in strict accordance wlth the manufacturer's printed insrructions. and apply them only hy mechanlcs specrally trained or experienced in their use. All surfaces must he clean and free of foreign matter hefore applylng sealing materrals. Sealing compounds shall he tooled to fill the joint and provide a smooth flnished surtice. Adequately anchor to mainrain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement. and spectiled wlnd loads. Dissimilar materials: 1. Where aluminum surtices come In contact wlth merals other than stainless steel, zinc, or white hronze of small area, ~x~late the alummum hy one of the following methods. a. Paint the disslmtlar meral with a prime cmat of zinc-chromate primer, followed hy two cwats of h. Paint the dlssmllar metal wtrh a ctwinc of heavybodied hituminous paint. c. Apply a gwd quallrv sealant material hetween the aluminum and the dissimilar metal. d. Isolate the dlswnllar mrtals wlth non-ahsorprtve rape or gaskets. aluminum m~tal-and-masonry paint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Lahels: 1. Leave all lahels m placc. Intact and Ieglhlt.. mrll rwwwed and approved by the Owner's 2. Do not at any tmt. rc'mcwv rcqulred AAhlA lahelh. Representative. B. Prwr to completion cdrhc Wgd. th<rnwghly cluan all t.xposc1J surfaces ofstorefronrs. I. Use only the clranlnC mart.rl;al> and technique rccommended hy the manufacturer of the material 2. Ik) not scrdtch nlherww damage the gh, screen. or aluminum finish. heing cleaned. END OF SELTION ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS. CMWD @841@-4 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Pmvide aluminum windows and screens where shown on the Drawings, as specified hereln, and as needed for a complete and proper mstallation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrances and storefronts. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation prncedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. All required test reports and warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiilr with the specifled requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of thr work of this Section. B. Provide test reports from AAMA accredlterl lahratorles certifying the performance as specified in 1.5 C. Test reports shall he accompanied hy the wlndow manufacturer's letter of certification staring that the tested wlndow meets or exceeds the referenced criterra fnr the appropriate ANSI/AAMA 101-68 window type. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions nf Sectlon 01614 1.5 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test units 1. Air, water and structural test unit sizes and configuration shall conform to requirements set forth in ANSUAAMA 101-68. ALUMINUM WINDOWS - CMWD 06520-1 B. Test procedures and performance 1. Windows shall conform to all ANSI/AAMA 101-88 DH-HC50 requirements for the window types referenced in Sectlon 2.1A. In addition, the following speciflc performance requlrements shall he met: a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit In accordance with ASTM E h. Air infiltration shall not exceed .IO cfm per foot of perimeter crack length. a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance wlth ASThl E 33 1 at statlc air pressure difference of 7.50 psf. h. There shall he no uncontrolled water leakage. a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E h. at conclusion of test there shall he no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners. hardware 330 at a static alr pressure difference of 75 psf posltive pressure and 75 psf negxive pressure. parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage which would cause the window to he inoperable. 2. Alr infiltration test: 283 at static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf. 3. Water resistance test 4. Uniform load structural test 5. Condensation Resistance Test (CW) a. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1988. h. Condensatlon Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not he less than 41. a. With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-1988. h. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-value) shall not he more than .64 BTJ/hr/sj/degrees F. 6. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-value) 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Total window system 1. The responsible Contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for two years the satisfactory performance of the total window installation which includes that ofthe windows, hardware, glass, glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy as called for In the speciflcations and approved shop drawings. responsible Contractor at hls expense during the warranty perid. 2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meetlng the specifications shall he ccrrected hy the PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. All alummum wlndows will have the following attrihutes: 1. Aluminum ?. Weatherstrip 3. Glash and glanng a. Extruded aluminum shall he 6063-T5 alloy and temper. a. Prlmary weathersalp shall he hy SchlcpA Flnseal or equal. a. Window manufacturer shall furnish glass mulaced units and factory glaze all windows. Field h. Insulated glass units shall consist of %" thick solarwey glass on the outhoard lite, !4" air space. glarlng shall not he permitted. and %" thick clear tempered glass on the Inhoard lite for a total 1" thick unlt. All Insulated glass units to he manufactured wlth warm edge technology. B. Fixed aluminum windows 1. Drawings and specificatlons are based on EFCO Thermal Series 6600 (fixed) AAMA Designation DH-HC50 complete with hardware and related components. ALUMINUM WINDOWS. CMWD 08520-2 2. Exterior snap on muntin finish to match window frames and be provided by window manutacturer. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. All aluminum frame and sash extrusions shall have a mlnimum wall thickness of ,062”. 2. Depth of frame and sash shall not he less than 3 7/8”. 3. Sill has a minimum wall thickness of ,094“. 4. Mechanical fasteners. welded components and hardware items shall not hridge thermal harrier B. Frame 1. Frame components shall he mechanically fastened. Frame sill member shall have a mlnimum wall thickness of .062“. comers are of screw spline construction and sealed. C. Sash 2. Each comer shall be mitered, reinforced and mechanically fastened. Cornen are of screw sph 1. All sash head and sill extrusions shall be tubular and shall have a minimum wall thickness of ,062”. 3. Dual-weather stripped and continuous interlock at meeting rail. construction and sealed. D. Balances 1. Balances shall be of appropriate size and capacity to hold sash in position in accordance wlth 2. Balances shall be high performance sash balances that are tested in accordance with AAMA 902-92 3. Balances shall meet all minimum Class 5 requirements with a minimum .30 Manuualy Applied 4. Compliance to 902-92 Class 5 and Manually Applied Force ratio shall be verified by a test report 5. Balances shall he attached to a locking carrier system which slides on extruded rails in the jamh AAMA 101-88, Section 2.2.3.3.2, and AAMA 902-92, Section 8.1 ‘Voluntary Specifications for Sash Balances.’ Force Ratio (MAF). from an AAMA accredited laboratory. channels. Sash shall be field removable for installation and maintenance. Mounting hrackets that are screw attached to sash will not he allowed. E. Screens 1. Screen frames shall he extruded aluminum. 2. Screen mounting holes in the window frame shall he iactory drilled 3. Screen mesh shall he aluminum. F. Glazing 1. All factory glared unm shall he ‘wet glazed’ nn the exterinr with a silicone hackbed compound (to he GE SCS-25 11 or equal) and a snap-in extruded aluminum glazing head and PVC bulh nn the merinr. 2. Air spacer is to be continuous, one piece, tin plated steel ‘U’ channel, 3. Desiccated butyl is tn be extruded onto Inside weh of ‘U’ channel, full penmeter. G. Finish 1. Organic: Finish all expsed areas of alummum wlndnws and components in the facility of the manufacturer with color in accordance with Alummum Assoclarion Designation AA-M12-C42. R1X-605.2 AAMA (silicone polyester baked enamel) ‘Vitrisil’. Color is to he ‘Military Blue.’ H. Thermal barrier 1. Barrier material shall be poured in place two-part polyurethene. A nonstructural thermal barrier is unacceptable. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM WINDOWS. CMWD 08520-3 A. Provide miscellaneous alummum trim angles. closures. etc. as indicated on the drawings. flnish to he custom sihcone polyester haked enamel flnish to match windows. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct condmons detrimental to rlmely and proper completion of the Work. Dn not proceed until unsatisfactoq conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative, anchoring all units firmly into position square, plumh, straight, and rrue. B. Dissimilar materials: 1. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel. zinc, or white hronze of small area, isolate the aluminum hy one of the following methods. a. Paint the dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc-chromate primer, followed hy twn coats of aluminum metal-and-masonry paint. h. Paint the dissimilar metal with a coating of heavybodied hituminous paint. c. Apply a good quality sealant material hetween the aluminum and the dissimilar metal. d. Isolate the dissimilar metals with non-ahsnrptive tape or gaskets. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After completion of window nmallarion. windows shall he inspected and adjusted 3.4 CLEANING A. Labels: 1. Leave all labels in place, inract and Iegihle, until reviewed and approved hy the Owner's 2. &I not at any tlme remnve required AAMA lahels. Representatwe. B. Prior to completlon of the Work. rhornughly clean all exp~wd surfaces of windows and screens. 1. Use only the cleanmg marerials and techniques recommended hy the manufacturer of the material 2. DI not scratch or nthenvisc damage the glass. screen, nr aluminum fin& king cleaned. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS. CMWD 08520-4 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work included: 1. Furnish f1nlsh hardware required to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and as specified 2. Furnish trm attachments and fastenings, specified or otherwise required, for proper and complete herein; 3. Deliver to the job site those items of finish hardware scheduled to he installed at the joh site; and installation; deliver to other points of msrallation those items of finish hardware scheduled to he factory installed. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General 2. Installation of finish hardware is described in other Sections of these Specifications. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. C. Definitions: 1. "Hardware groups" described in the Hardware Schedule in Part 3 of this Section are as shown on the Door Schedule of the Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. suhmlt: 1. Materials list of Items proposed to he provided under this Section. a. In this regard. note that the Finish Hardware Schedule in Part 3 of this Section is firm and that suhstitutlons will not he considered except as approved in advance hy the Owner's Representarlve or as shnwn to he required hecause nf non-availahility of the specified item. b. Approval of this list hy the Owner's Representative will not relieve the Contractor of the responsihilmy to prnvide all finish hardware Items requlred for the Work even though such required Items may not have heen shown on the approved list. C. Samples: 1. Within 15 calendar days after heing so requested by the Owner's Representative. deliver to the 2. All Samples will he returned tu the Contractor; prnvided those Samples which arc approved hy the Owner's Representative Samples of each finish hardware item. Owner's Represenratlve are positively denrlficd and are lnstdlled In the Work at lncarmns agreed til hy the Owner's Represenratlve. D. Templates: In a timely manner to assure orderly progress of the Work, deliver templates or physical samples of the approved finish hardware items to pertlnenr manufacturers of interfacing Items such as dmrs and kames. E. The hardware schedule shall detail all door locations. sizes, materials, labels and proper handing. FINISH HARDWARE ~ CMWD 08710-1 F. Indicate locatlons and mountings helphtb deach rype of hardware. G, Indlcate quantitiy, complete parr nurnlvr> and installation locatlon for each piece of hardware H. Suhmit manutacturer's cerrifxarion th;n tlrr-rated hardware meets or rxcreds specified requlremenrs. 1. Include data on operating hardware, luhrlcatlons requirements, and Insprctlon procedures rriared to preventatwe maintenance. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Companies specrallzlng In manufacturing door hardware with minimum flvr years experience. B. Hardware supplier: Company specializlnp in supplylnf: insritutional door hardware with three years experience. Company shall provide the srrvices of an AHC or DAHC memher of rhe COOT Hardware lnsritute to: 1. Be available for consultation with the Owner's Represenrative at no additional cost to the Owner during progress of consrruction; 2. Be present at complrtlon of construction. and: a. Inspect installarlon of all flnlsh hardware Items; h. Make all minur ad~ustments required; and c. Report to the Owner's Representative on completeness of rhe insrallarion. C. The hardware consultant may he an employee of the supplier D. Conform to Chapter 10. Califvmia Buildlng Code and NFPA Standard Number 80. for requirements appllcahle to fire rated dwrs and frames. E. The hardware schedule shall derail all &xIr Iosarlons, s~zes, marerials, lahels and proper handing F. Conform to applicahle srctlonh 01 the Califomra Buildinc Code. G. Provide UL lahels on all panlc drv~ces In flre-rated {lpcnlnps H. Provide California Srarr F~rc Marbhall Llsrlnr: t,~r all ilre cxlr hardware. I. Comply with ADA - Amerlcanh wrh Dadhillties Act 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANL) HANL)LING A. Comply with pertlnenr pn,v~rlon\ a~t Section 01614. B. Individually package each unlr a~t tmsh hardware. complcrr. wrh proper fastenings and appurtenances, dearly marked on rhr c~urdc In\hcarr conrenrh and spccltlc Iocarlons In the Work. C. Dellver keys to Ownrr hy hccurtrv hlpment dlresr from l~d manufdcture D. Protect hardware fmm rhctr hv uralopmg anrl snmnc In dry. ~~urr area. 1.5 Guarantees A. Provide a 2-year written Cuaranrec. Sad Lwarantre shall read as follows: 'Fnr a period of nor less rhan two (2) years, we (Firm Name) u111 ,erv~ce and nr rrplace, ar no charge to the Owner, any pan pn)vlng door closers shall he guaranrred fix twenty-flve (25) ycars. This guarantee does not covCr ahnormal defective due to faulty manuiacrurr oi marerials. Panic Lkvlces to he guaranteed for five (5) years and FINISH HARDWARE. CMWD 08710-2 operation conditions or ahusive johsite treatment after acceptance of work hy Owner.' PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fastenen: 1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitahle size and type to anchor the hardware 2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with toggle holts, expansion shields. sex holts. and other anchors in position for long hfe under hard use. approved hy the Owner's Representatwe. according to the material to whlch the hardware is to he applied and according to the recommendations of the hardware manuiacrurer. 3. Provide fasteners which harmonize with the hardware as to flnlsh and materlal. B. Where hutts are required to swing 180". furnish butts of sufficient throw to clear the trim C. Furnish silencers for door frames at the rate of three for each single door and two for each door or pair of doors; except weatherstripped doors and dnon with light seals or sound seals. 2.2 KEYING A. Locks, Deadbolts. Cylinders, Padlocks 1. All locks and cylinders shall be keyed to a new 6-pin grandmasterkey system. Furnish 6 of each 2. All Keying shall he completed and registered at the Lock Factory. Provide key hitting charr to 3. All Keying requirements shall he estahlished hy Hardware Distributor with input from Owner and 4. Provide manufacturers temporary construction masterkey system. Furnish 6 consrruction masterkey. 5. Deliver all Permanent keys directly to Owner's Representative. Masterkey. Furnish 3 change keys per lock. Owner's Representative when requested to do so in writing. Owner's Representatwe. B. Identification and delivery: 1. Factory stamp permanent keys, "Do NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to the Owner by registered mail nr receipted personal delwery. 2.3 TOOLS AND MANUALS A. Provide special wrenches and tools appiicahle to each different or Specid! hardware component. B. Prnv~de malntenance reds and accessories suppl~ed hy hardware component manufacturer. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Single source for items: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved In advance hy the Owner's Representative, furnish for each item (such as "d'rx hurt type 25 mm [l"]) nnly the product nfa single manufacturer (such as "Soss BB 1279). ofa single mdnUfdCtUIt1 (such as "Soss"). 2. To the maxlmum extent practlcahle, turnlsh almilar items (such as "door hurts") only as the product B. For each of the required items nf finish hardware, provide from the specified manufacturer or from one of the indicated acceptahle suhstltutes. FINISH HARDWARE - CMWD 08710-3 Acceptahle Item Listed Manufacturer Substitute: Hinges: Locks & cylinders Panics: Electrical Hardware A.F. Bolts/Coordinator Door closers: Push/Pulls Overhead stops & holders Wall and floor stops Weatherstrlp & thresholds ( BOM ) Bommer (SCH) Schlaw (DOR) Dorma (ACS) Architectural Control System (TR1)Tnmco (TRI)Trimco (DON Dorma (TRI) Trmco (NGP) Natmnal Guard (mR) bmld Haeer, McKmne) As sprciiied As specified As specitled BBW, lves As specified BBW, lves As specitlecl BBW, lves As specified C. Provide the finishes shown on the schedule and conforming to the following standards ofsymhols Finish/Description US Symbol BHMA Number 1. Prime Coat PC 2. Polished Brass 3 3. Satin Brass 4 4. Polished Bronze 9 5. Satin Bronze 10 6. Oil Ruhhed Bronze 10B 7. Satin Chromium 26D 8. Polished Chromium 26 9. Stainless Steel 32D 10. Polished Stainless Steel 32 600 606 605 612 611 613 6261652 630 6251651 629 2.5 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that dmrs and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated dev~ccs. C. kelnnlng of installation means acceptance of exlstlnc conditions 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's mstructions 8. Use the templates provided by hardware Item manufacturer. C. Mounting heiehts for Hardware: 1. Lrksecs: 40-5/16 inches from flmr to centerhne of lever or handle. 2. Hinges: 5 inches from head of openmg to top of top hinge; 10 inches from finish flcmr to hottom of bottom hinge; intermediate hmge(s) spaced equidistant between top and bottom hurts. D. Conform to ANSI AI 17.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped, FINISH HARDWARE - CMWD 08710-4 E. fitting hardware to doors remove all finish hardware except hurt hinges. caretully replace in properly marked hoxes and place in stomp until pamtmg and tmishing is cwnpleted. After pamtmg and finishing IS completed, permanently install flnlsh hardware. F. Secure finish hardware with suitahle fasteners of the same matenal and finish as the item king attached. G. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry. H. Mount exit devices and closers on mineral or parrde core fire doors with closed heat sex hoks 3.3 FASTENERS A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat phillips head, counrersunk type; provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood. B. Screws for hurt hinges shall he flat phillips head, countersunk, full-thread t)7~. C. Fastening of closer hases of closer shoe to doors shall be hy means of sex holts and spray painted to match closer finish. 3.4 BUrr HINGES A. Furnish 3 ea. 4-1/2 hall or 'oilite' bearing hinges at dm up to 89 tall. Furnish one additional hinge for each additional 30 of dwr height. B. Furnish 5" extra heavy duty hinges at doors wider than 42". C. Furnish 5" extra heavy duty hinges where listed in hardware groups. D. Provide extra heavy duty hmges where listed in hardware groups E. Provide sufficient hinge width to clear trim and allow 180 degree swing. F. All hinges shall he manufactured in the United Stares 3.5 LOCKS A. Provide locks as scheduled with 2-3/4 hackset. Lrlcks for labeled dmrs shall have a fusihle link mechanism to prevent rerraction In the evenr of fire. B. Furnish strikes with curved lip ofsufficient lenmh to clear trim and protect clothing 3.6 DOOR CLOSERS A. Provide adjustable closers wirh the followmg maximum pressure for opening dmrs. Ad~usr closers after installation. and tesr donrs In the evenr of fm. Interior lhrs: 5.0 pounds pressure Extenor DO(>IS: 8.5 pounds pressure Fire Doors: 15.0 pounds pressure B. Comply with Title 24, CCR, Part 2, Section 2-3304 (1). C. Factory Representative shall visit project prior to acceprance of project by owner to Insure installation and ad~ustmenr of closers is correct. FINISH HARDWARE. CMWD 08710-5 D. Fumish mountlng plates and hrdckets as necessary tn allow for a complete Installation. 3.7 SIGNS A. Exit doors with dead locks (for “IY (xcupancies) shall have indicating type l(xk hardware or approprlate signmng u1 accordance with Section 1004.3 of 1998 CBC; “THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHENEVER THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED.” Doors with pan~c devices are excepted frnm this provision. 3.8 PANIC DEVICES A. All panic devices must meet ANSI Standard 156.3, Grade 1. Panic Devices must he UL llsted and California Stare Fire Marshall Listed. All Rail Assemblies shall he made of hrass. bronze or stainless steel. Springs shall he manufactured of stainless steel. Push Rail height shall he 40 frnm flwr tn centerline. All mm shall be thm bolted. Provide fire rated devices at labeled openings as noted in Door Schedule. 3.9 AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS AND CO-ORDINATORS A. Shall he tested by independent lah for cycle test of 100,ooO cycles minimum. Units must comply with UL specifications for use on fire rated opnings up to three (3) hours for metal dwrs and one and one half (1- Auto flushbolts shall have a built-in override feature engineered to prevent damage to door, frame. or hlr 1/2) hour for wood doors. Units shall work with five (5) pounds of closing force for top and hottom bolts. assembly should circumstances prevent normal operation. 3.10 THRESHOLDS & DOOR SEALS A. Extruded thresholds shall he made from S6063,T5 Alloy aluminum, and/or #385 alloy hrorue (hrass) as noted in hardware schedule. Door seals and thresholds for fire labeled doors shall he tested and approved hy an independent khoratory as follows: 1. NFPA 105-1989 2. UL-1784 3. UL-IOB and C. B. Provide seals 61 thresholds as noted in hardware schedule and/or on sill detail. Provide carpet separators as necessary to comply wlth fire codes. All exterior thresh(dds shall he set in a full hed of butyl mastic. 3.1 1 SECURITY PULLS A. Prnvide 1096HA/1097HA Pulls as noted In schedule. Pull shall he approved for handicap use and shall he fumlshed in finlsh noted. Prnvlde SNB fareners for each pull. 3.12 PUSH-PULLS. STOPS 61 KICKPLATES A. shall he prnvided hy one manuidcturer. All pnducts shall he prnvided In aluminum, hrass, hrnnre or sramless steel base metals. Klckplates to he 0.50” material, heveled on four edges. Sharp edges on Push, Pull and Kick Plates will he suhlect to relectrm and replacement. All flwr stops must he mounted within 4” of adjacent walk or parntlons 3.13 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Fumlsh the following hardware k~(,ups In the amounts Indicated on the Drawings FINISH HARDWARE. CMWD 08710-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MISC. 1 5 5 6 1 NOT USED 7 8 9 9 10 9 2 3 4 11 12 13 FINISH HARDWARE - CMWD 08710-7 6 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 SET PIVOTS PIVOT MOD EXIT DEVICE POWER SUPPLY PROX READER CYLINDER EXIT DEVICE PULLS CLOSERS ACCESS RAMP SWEEPS SEAL HW. SET1 ",,, 13"L 11Cb ESjli'l? X 1003 ES 1 0C CRZlL-125 20-0?1 510c RTSYHBFE 1191-4 C607A R050 x RCE x MS/ES F625A @ HEAD bi JAMBS 626 600 630 600 600 626 630 630 628 620 SIA 620 DnR ACS DnR ACC LX)R SCH DCX TRI LX3R NGP NGP NGP NOTE: ASTRAGALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. SEE GENERAL NOTE 1 @ MISCELLANEOUS HW. SET 13. 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 SET HINGES LOCKSET ELEC. HlNGE PROX READER LOCK MOD POWER SUPPLY LOCK GUARD CLOSER KICKPLATE ACCESS RAMP STOP & ANCHOR SEAL SWEEP HW. SET Z LB8007-450-N LB8007-454-1104 LY070 x 06A CR2lL-125 1520 5000 1400-0 1 -00 8Y01SPA K0050 IC" X 2" LDW B4E R050 x RCE x MS/ES I214CK x 126RCK C607A FATT700SA @ HEAL) bi JAMBS 600 626 600 600 600 600 626 630 626 SIA 628 689 628 BOM ACS SCH ACS ACC TRI ACS DOR TRI TRI NGP NGP NGP NOTE: INSTALL SEAL BEFORE h1OUNTlNG CLOSER. SEE C;ENERAL NOTE 1 @ MISCELLANEOUS HW. SET 13. HW. SET 3 3 EA HINGES 1 EA LCCKSET 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA KICKPLATE 1 EA STOP 1 EA ACCESS RAMP 1 EA SWEEP 1 SET SEAL LR8000-454 W0 I Lo080 x 06A KC7050 IC" x 2" LDW l3A4E I;@i0 x RCE x MS/ES 1215CKU-E5 C:h07A FATT700SA @ HEAI) bi JAMBS 600 BOM 626 SCH 630 TRI 689 WR 626 TR1 620 NGP SIA NGP 628 NGP FINISH HARLlWARE . CMWD 08710-8 klL5Eu 2EA HINGES LB8004-450 1 EA LOCKSET L9070 x 06A 1 EA LOCKMOD 1520 1 EA PROX READER CR21L-125 1 EA POWER SUPPLY 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA KICKPLATE KO050 10” x 2” LDW ME 1 EA STOP 1 EA ACCESS RAMP 1 EA SWEEP C607A 1 SET SEAL FATT700SA @ HEAD & JAMBS 1400-01-00 8901 1215CKU-ES R050 x RCE x MS/ES NOTE: SEE GENERALNOTE 1 @ MISSCELLANEOUS HW. SET 13 3 EA HINGES 1 EA PULL PLATE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA KICKPLATE 1 EA MOP PLATE 1 EA STOP 1 SET SEAL HW. SET 5 LB8004-450 1001.11 8” x 16” ME 8901 x SN1 1018-3 4” x 16“ ME KO050 10” x 2” LDW ME ~ KM050 6” x 1” LDW B4E 1270WXCP 5020B @ HEAD &JAMBS 1 EA LOCKSET 1 EA O.H. CLOSER & PIVOT RTS88BF x RTS-02 MS1851S x 4560 1 EA CYLINDER 20-061 1 EA INDICATOR 1 SET PUSH-PULLS 4089 1741 x BTB 600 BOM 626 SCH 600 ACS 600 ACC 600 ACS 68R LX)R 630 TRI SIA NGf 626 TRI 628 NGP 628 NGP 652 BOM 630 TRI 630 TRI 689 DOR 630 TRI 630 TRI 630 TRI BRN NGP 628 DOR 628 ADR 626 SCH 630 TRI 628 ADR NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE AND DOOR SEALS BY ALUMINUM DOOR MANUFACTURER. 3 EA HINGES 1 EA PRIVACY SET I EA CLOSER I EA KICKPLATE 1 EA MOP PLATE 1 EA STOP 3 EA SILENCERS W. SET 2 L904@ x 06A x XL11-800 LB8000-450 K0050 10” x 2” LDW B4E 8901 x SN 1 KM050 6” x 1” LDW B4E 12 15CKU-ES 1229A NOTE: MARBLE THRESHOLD BY OTHERS. 652 BOM 689 DOR 626 SCH 630 TRI 630 TRI GRY TRI 626 TRI FINlSH HARDWARE ~ CMWD 08710-9 I3xLsEu 1 EA O.H. CLOSER & PIVOT RTS88BF x RTS02 1 EA LOCKSET 4510 X MS LEVER 1 EA CYLINDER 1 EA ELEC. STRIKE 1 EA PROX READER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY 1 EA STOP 1215CKU-ES 20-061 i500 CR21L-125 1400-01-00 1746 1 SET PUSH-PULL 628 DOR 628 ADR 626 SCH 626 ADR 600 ACC 600 ACS 630 TRI 626 TRI NOTE: DOOR SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. CARPET BY OTHERS. SEE GENERAL NOTE 1 @ MISCELLANEOUS HW. SET 13. m. 4 3 EA HINGES LB8000-450 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA LOCKSET L9070 x 06A 1 EA KICKPLATE 3 EA SILENCERS 1 EA STOP 89OlHO x SN1 KO050 lo” x 2” LDW B4E 1229A 1215CKU-ES 3 EA HINGES 1 EA LOCKSET 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA KICKPLATE ~ ~~~.~ 1 EA STOP 3 EA SILENCERS 3 EA HINGES 1 EA LOCK GUARD 1 EA LOCKSET 1 EA CLOSER 1 EA KICKPLATE 1 EA STOP & ANCHOR 1 EA THRESHOLD 1 EA LXX)R BOITOM 1 EA SWEEP 1 SET SEAL 1 EA DRIP CAP LB8000-450 L9080 x 06A K0050 10” x 2” LDW B4E 8901 x SN1 1229A 1215CKU-ES LB8003-450-N L9080 x 06A 890 1 SPA 5000 KO050 lo” x 2” LDW B4E 659A x MSIES 124CK x 1268CK 3205 C607A FATT700SA @ HEAD & IAMBS 16A x 40” 652 BOM 626 SCH 689 lxlR 630 TRI 626 TRI GRY TRI 652 BOM 626 SCH GRY TRI 600 BOM 626 TRI 626 SCH 689 DOR 630 TRI 628 NGP 626 TR1 628 NGP 628 NGP 628 NGP 628 NGP FINISH HARDWARE. CMWD 08710-10 Kw. SET u LB800i-450-N 3922-24" (TOPOF INACTIVE DR.) 8 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA ISET 1 EA HINGES SURFACE BOLT SURFACE BOLT O.H. HOLDERS LOCKSET KICKPLATES STOP & ANCHORS THRESHOLD DOOR BOlTOMS SWEEPS SEAL ASTRAGAL ~ ~ ~~ 3923-12'' (BOlTOM OF INACTIVE DR.) L9080 x 06A NO. 2 x 180 DEGREES KO050 10" x 1" LDW ME 1214CK x 1268CK 659A x MSA 320s C607A FATT7OOSA @ HEAD 61 JAMBS 139SP x 5050B-FULL HEIGHT NOTE: INSTALL SEAL BEFORE MOUNTING O.H. HOLDERS. H!LELl3 MISCELLANEOUS: 3 EA KEYS PER LOCK/CYLINDER* .__ 3 EA GRANDMASTERKEYS* 6 EA MASTERKEYS PER SET* 6 EA CONSTRUCTION MASTERKEYS 1 EA HIRSCH ELECTRONICS "VELOCITY FOR WINDOWS 2000" 1 EA STAMP ALL KEYS "DO NOT DUPLICATE" IOOEA PROXIMITY CARDS *DELIVER THESE ITEMS TO THE OWNER VIA REGISTERED DELIVERY, SECURITY INFORMATION MANAGEMENT/ACCESS SYSTEM 600 630 630 626 680 630 626 62R 628 628 628 628 BOM TRI TRI SCH NOR TRI TRI NGP NGP NGF NGP NGP GENERALNOTES: 1. INSTALLATION OF CARD READER, POWER SUPPLY AND RELATED ELECTRICAL HARDWARE SHALL BE HANDLED BY ACCURATE SECURITY PROFESSIONALS. CONTACT MR. DANE TERRY AT ACCURATE SECURITY PROFESSIONALS FOR MATERIAL AND LABOR COSTS. PHONE NO. 858-271-1155. 2. ALL EXTERIOR METAL THRESHOLDS SHALL BE SET IN A FULL BED OF BUTYL MASTIC. 3. WHERE 700SA SEALS ARE SPECFIED, INSTALL SEAL BEFORE MOUNTING CLOSERS AND O.H. HOLDERS. END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE. CMWD 08710-11 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide glazing and glaring accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified hereln. and as needed for a complete and proper insrallatlon. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily llmited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificstions. 3. Section 08520 - Aluminum windows. 2. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrances and storefronts. 1.2 SUBMIiTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Prtreed. suhmit: 1. Materials list of item proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturers' recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requlrements; Representative, will become the hasis for acceptmg or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Samples: Accompanying the ahove product data, suhmit: 1. Samples of each type of glass and glazing head proposed to he used; 2. Samples of each type of sealant proposed to he used, tested for each suhstrate involved (ADD-certified hy the sealant suppller if organic coattngs are involved). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in thc necessary crafts and completely famillar with the specified requirements and methods needed fur proper performance of the work of this Section. B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdlctlon, comply with pertinent recommendations contdlned in: 1. Flat Glass Marketlng Associatlon: a. "Sealant Manual"; h. "Glazing Manual"; 2. ASTM publications pertaining to glaring. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Sectlon 01614 and with pertinent glass handllng and storage recommendations contained In the referenced standards. GLAZING - CMWD 08800-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS A. General: 1. For all glass, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specitied herein. 2. Where type or thicknes5. 111 hoth. are not shown nn the Drawings or specifled hereln, provide type and thickness approved hy the Owner'L Rrprrsentatlve. 8. Float glass. clear: Comply wirh ASTM C1@36-9@, T~pe I, Class 1. Quality q5 C. Clear wire glass: Provide Twr 11. Class 1. Furm 1. Quahtv q8. Pattern ml wre mesh, where shown (11 required. D. Tempered or heat-strengthened glass: 1. Comply wtth ASTM C1-48-90 and ANSI 297.1-84 for fully tempered nr heat-strengthened glass where Indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere as rrquired by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. h. For heat ahsorhinr glass, and reflective as required, use Type I. Class 2, Quality q5, Style B. in a. For float glass, clear, use Type 1, Class 1, Quality q5; color as shown on thr Drawings or otherwise specified hy the Owner's Representative. c. Prior to tempering or heat treating, seam glass un required sizes as determined by accurate measurements nf the openings to he glared. maklng allowances for required edge clearances and glass lap in accordance with industry standards. 2. Glass for tempering: d. Clean cut edges in accordance wlth the glass manufacturer's recommendations. f. Except as otherwrc approved In advance hy the Owner's Representatwe. when tong marks are e. Edge treatment In the iield 1s not permitted. required locate ar hottorn edgr of thr lltr and concraled hy the glazing rahhet. g. Warpage greater than perrnmed hy the retrrenced standards will not he approved. E. Laminated glass: 1. Comply with ASTM CI I i2.Y I lnr all lamlnarrcl clrar and/or tinted as shnwn on the Drawings, consisting of an Inner lace and an outer tact. of Qdrty q5 flwat glass laminated under heat and pres- sure to a minmum of 3.C rnll thlck PVB plasr~c Interlayer. rrcommended hy the manutwurcr or suppl~er. glass manuidcturer. 2. Use 6 mm (1/4") thlcknw lor maximum s1:r5 <If 1.5 m x 3 m (60 x 120"), or as otherwise 3. For larger sms. use he;tr-men:rhcned or ~warcr rhlcknes as recommended for this lnsrallation hy the G. Specific glass types: 1. "Type 1" (aluminum vnrrmxc. anJ mrefrc)nr\): tlnzts hc I" fdctory glared per specifications section 2. "Type 2" (alummum w~ndtwb): umrs t<> hc I" iamry glatud prr specifications sectlon 08520 - 3. "Type 3" (alummum u1nLLw tr;unm and orher. n<>r qxuitd): %"clear sin&! glazed tempered; 08410 - alumlnum entrance.. id srorefronrb.; alummum windows.; 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Prnvidr other materrala. no1 ~pcc~l~callv drscrlhcd htlr rrqu~rcrl fix a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contracror ,uhpr the appnwal <I{ the Owner's Rrpresentative. PART 3 - EXECUTION GLAZING - CMWL) 08800-2 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. 0. 3.2 A. 8. C. 3.3 A. B. Examlne the areas and conditions under whxh work of this Section will he performed. Correct condmnns derrmenral tn tlmely and proper completmn of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfacton. condltlons are corrected. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rahhets tn receive the glaring materials, making free trom ohsrructlons and deleterious substances which might impair the work. 1. Remove protective coatings whlch might fail in adhesion or interfere with hond of sealants. 2. Comply with manutacturers' insrructlons for final wqing of surfaces ~mmedratelp pr~or to apphcaram 3. Prune surfaces to recelve glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. of prlmer and glazmg compounds or tapes. 1NSTALLATlON Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched, ahraded. or 2. Where lahels are provided hy the glass supplier, do not remove such lahels until 50 directed hy the 3. lnstall glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction. Locate sill setting blocks of standard width and thickness at quarter points of all glass lites unless otherwise recommended hy the glass manufacturer or supplier. 1. Use blocks of proper Durometer. size, and thickness to support the glass in accordance with the 2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from stops; except deficient in any other manner. Owner's Representative. manufacturer's recommendations. where continuous glazing gaskets or other resilient glazing materials are used. a. Locate spacers no more than 600 mm (24" ) apart, and no closer to a comer rhan 300 mm (12"). h. Place spacers opposlte one another. c. Provide glass lap and edge clearances as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest pussihle degree of uniformity In appearance. locating all '"hugs" In lower rlght hand interior comer. 1. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the jolnt use is 2. Ifnecessary, mask or ntherwise protect suridccs adlacent tn installation of sealants. 3. Cut and seal the joints ofglazlng easkets In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, to recommended hy the manufacturer and approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. provide watertight and airtight seal at comers and other locations where joints are required. PROTECTION Where 50 dnected, protect glass from hreakage after mstallatrm hy promptly installing streamers or ribbons. sultahly attached to the framlng and held free from glass. directed hy the Owner's Represenratwe. Do nor apply warning markings, streamers, rlhhcms. or other items directly to the glass except as specifically END OF SECTION GLAZING, CMWD 08800-3 Division 09 Finishes SECTION 092N LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 ~ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide lath and plaster where indlcated on the Drawings, as specified hereln. and as needed fnr a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to. General 2. Section 07110 - Membrane waterproofing. Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificatlons. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures for accessories which, when approved by the 3. Samples of the proposed accessories; requirements; Owner's Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used for those accessories on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhen of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specifled requlrements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Secnon. B. In addition to complying with pertment codes and regulations of governmental agencies having lurisdrtion. comply with materrals handling and workmanshy provisions of the "Reference Specifications" ofrhe Californra Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association. C. Mock-ups: 1. At an area on the slte where approved hv the Owner's Representative. provide mock-up exterior lath and plaster panel. a. Make the mock-up panel approxlmately 4'4" high and 6'.0" long. h. The mock-up panel may he parr of the Work, and may hc incorporated into the finished Work c. Revise texture as necessary to secure the Owner's Representative's approval of deslred finish when so approved hy the Owner's Representative. coat texture and appearance. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. LATH AND PLASTER - CMWD 09200-1 PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL MEMBERS A. Steel channels: 1. Comply with ASTM A109 or ASTM A303. 2. Hot-rolled or cold-rolled channels for framing: Use galvanized. 3. Cold-rolled channels: Provide flanges not less than 11 mm (7/16) wide. 4. Provide channels with minlmum weights as follows: Hot-rolled steel: Cold-rolled steel: Nominal Lhs per Lhs per size: foot faot: 38 mm (1-1/2") 1.120 0.475 25 mm (1") 0.410 20 mm (3/4 0.300 0.300 _____ B. Metal plastering accessories: 1. Fabricate from 26 gage or heavier hot-dip galvanized steel, prime-coated unless otherwise specifically 2. Use manufacturer's standard shapes specifically designed for the proposed use. 3. Provide protective coating to permit removal of overspray upon completion of plastering. 4. At all outside comers provide welded wire comer aids. approved by the Owner's Representative. C. Aluminum moldings: 1. Provide the following aluminum moldings as shown on the Drawings, as manufactured hy Fry Reglet Corporation, 625 South Palm Avenue. Alhambra. CA 91803, (a) 237-9773. Provide other manufacturers when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. a. Fry DS - 875-V-200 vent screed at exterior soffits. h. Fry DS - 875-V-300 vent screed at exterior soffits at metal standing seam roof eave. d. Fry F'CS - 100-75 for exterlor stucco reveals and at ceramic tile reveals. c. Fry DS - 875-875 drip screed at exterior window and overhead door detail. e. All aluminum moldings to receive factory sprayed prime paint. baked-on, to serve as a base for field painting. D. Aluminum foundation weep screed: Provide aluminum foundatinn weep screed as shown on the Drawings model swsO78-312 by Superior Metal Trlm. a divlsion of Delta Star, Inc., 1777 industrial Way, Belmont, CA 94002, (800) 892-8673. E. Hangers supporting runner channels: 1. Provide soft annealed steel w~re not smaller than 8 page and complying with Fed Spec QQ.W-461, 2. Flat Iron or steel straps at ledst 2.4mm x 22 mm (3/32" x //E") size, galvanized or coated with IUS[. galvanized. inhihirive paint, may be used In heu of the spectfied hanger wire. F. Meral lath: 1. Provide paper-hacked metal lath welded ur wwen in such a manner as to prnvide not less than 6 mm (1/4) keying hetween wire and paper hackinfi; nr ohrain keying hy a unifnnn series ofskm in a paper separator woven hetwren the two layers of wire. 2. Comply with Fed Spec 4Q-L-101. 2.2 PLASTER A. Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C150. type I. 2. Do nor use plastic cement of any type LATH AND PLASTER. CMWD 09200-2 B. Lme: 2. Lime putty (if used): Weigh no mtre than 3i.65 kg per cu (83 Ihs per cu fr) I. Provide dry hydrated Lime complying with ASTM CZ06. C. Sand: Comply with ASTM C144, clean and well graded from coarse to fine D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acid, alkali, and orgmic materrals. 2.3 LIQUID BONDING COAT (AT MASONRY WALLS) A. Provide liquld acrylic hondlnC cnat at all masonry walls tn receive plaster. Acrylic liquid hnding coat to he 'Daraweld-C'manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co., Santa And, CA (800) 852-6055 or equal when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representatwe. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisiactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING A. Coordination: 1. Carefully cwrdindre wlrh other trades to assure proper provision in such work for installation of the 2. Provide emhedded wrr supports as necessary work of this Sect~on. B. Install memhers and cornpmenrs In strict accordance wlth arangements shown on the hawings and the manufacturer's recommcndarlons ab approveJ hy the Owner's Representative. C. Alignment: 2. Alip horiznnrally wlthln a tolerance done In 500. 1. Alp vertically wlrhln a rolerance ofnne In I@O@. 3. On framing memhers to rccelve a frushrd plaster surf~cc, al~p the finlsh suhsurface tn vary not more than 3 mm (l/s") inm the plane auti:~ces of adpxnt framing and furring memhers. 3.3 LATHING A. Install the approved metal lath In srrlct accordance with the manuiacturet's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Kcprercnr;ltlvr. and wrrh pertlnent requirements of governmental agencies havlng Jurtsdlction. 3.4 PLASTERING A. Perform mixing, plasterlnC. and plaster curmg In strict accordance with provisions of the referenced standards. LATH AND PLASTER. CMWD 09200-3 B. Scratch coat: 1. Apply with sufficient material and force ro form gd keys, ernhedding and filhng all spaces otthe 2. Score to receive rhe hrown coat. lath. C. Brown coat: 1. Do not apply hrown coat sooner than 48 hours after installation of the scratch cm. 2. Apply the hrown coat ro the scratch coat. 3. .Bring out to grounds, straighten to a true surface, and leave sufficiently rough to assure adequate hond ofrhe finish coar. D. Finish coat: 2. Where stucco finish is called out far on the drawings, provide a light dash finlsh as approved hy thr 1. Do not apply finish coat smner than seven days after installation of the hrown coat. 3. Where accent stucco finish is called out for on the drawings, provide a tunnel dash finish as 4. Apply finish coat in a finish approved by the Owner's Representative per mock-up in section 1.3C. Owner's Representative. approved hy the Owner's Representative. E. Tolerances: Finish plaster true and even within a tolerance of one in 500, leaving the finished surCace free from tool marks and other blemishes. 3.5 CLEANING UP A. Wipe metal accessories clean after application of each coar B. In addition to other protection, protect adjacent surfaces from the accidental application of plaster. C. In addinon to other requirements for cleaning, immediately upon completion of this portion of the Work vlsually inspect adjacenr surfaces and remove all traces of spilled and splashed plaster. END OF SECTION LATH AND PLASTER. CMWD 09200-4 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide gypsum drywall and accessories where shown on che Drawings, as specified herem, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited tn. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMIlTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials llst of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and ocher data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; Representative, will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Mock-ups: 1. At a location on the site where approved hy the Owner's Representative. provide a mock-up gypsum a. Make the panel approximately 1.2 m (4'-0") square. wallhoard panel. h. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wallhoard finish used on the Work. c. The mock-ups may he used as part of the Work. and may he included In the finished Work. d. Revlse as necessary to secure the Owner's Representative's approval. fur comparison with the remainder of the work of thls Section for the purpose of acceprance or relecrmn. 3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to he part nf the finished Work, completely demolish and remnve them from the ]oh site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Sectlon. when so approved hy the Owner's Representative. 2. The mock-up panels, when approved hy the Owner's Representative, will he used as datum points 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers nf skdled workmen thurouphly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely Camiliar with the specified requlrements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of rhls Sectim. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM ~ CMWD 09260-1 PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. General: 1. Provide gypsum wallhoard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, in 1.2 m (48") widths and in such 2. Regular wallhoard: Provide type Ill. grade R, class 1.16 mm (5/8") thick except as mav he shown 3. Fire-retardant wallboard: Provide type Ill. grade X, class 1. 16 mm (5/8") thtck. 4. Water-resistant wallhoard: Provide twe VU, grade W or X as requlred. class 2, 16 mm (5/R") thick 5. Cement hacker hoard: Provide 'Durock' cement board hy USG or equivalent when approved hy lengths as will result in a minimum ofjoints. otherwise on the Drawings. except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawmgs. Owner's Representatwe. 16 mm (5/8") thick UL listed. cut to size and cured ends square cut with edges reinforced and formed smooth with wrapped edges. B. Shaft walls: Where so indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard system specifically designed for encasing shafts of the required fire-resistivity, and complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D. type IV, Fade R or X, class 1, in the dimenstons shown or otherwise requlred. C. Sheathing: Where gypsum wallboard sheathing is indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallhoard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D. type 11, grade W. class 2. 2.2 METAL TRIM A. Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage, complying with Fed Spec a4-S-775, type I, class d or e. B. Casing beads: 1. Provide channel-shapes with an exposed wing, and with a concealed wing not less than 22 mm 2. The exposed wing may he covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall he suitable for joint (7/8") wide. treatment. C. Comer heads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 22 mm (7/8") wide and perforated for nailing and joint treatment. or wlrh comhinatton metal and paper wings honded together, not less than 31 mm (1-1/4) wide and sultabk for joint treatment. D. Edge heads for use at permeter ofceiltngs: 1. Provide angle shapes with wngs not less than 20 mm (3/4) wide. 2. Provlde concealed wml: perforated for nailtnc. and exposed wlng edge folded flat. 3. Exp~,sed wlng may hr tactory ftnlshed tn whlte cdor. 2.3 JOINTING SYSTEM A. Provide a lointtng system, lncludinc relnforctnl: rape and compound, designed as a system ro he used tocerher and as recommended for thts use by the manufacrurrr ofrhe gypsum walhmJ appravrd for use on the Wwk. B. Jointmg compound may he used for fmishlng if so recommended hy its manufacrurer 2.4 FASTENING DEVICES A. For fastening gypsum wallhoard In place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat-head screws, shouldered, specially designed fnr use wirh power-driven tools, not less than 1" long. with self-tapping threads and self-drilllng pomts. GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM ~ CMWD 09260-2 B. For fastening msum wallhoard in place on wood. use 31 mm (1,1/4") type W hugle-head screws. or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C514 and of the length required hy governmental agencles having juradlction. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. In partitions and ceilings lnstalled under this Section. provide doors where required for access to mechanical installations and electrical installations. B. Types: 1. Unless otherwise required, provide 600 mm x 600 mm (24" x 24) metal access doors wlth 2. For plercing fire-rated sutiaces. provide access doors having the same fire raring as the surface heing 3. For tile surfaces and toilet rooms, provide stainless steel access doors and hames, with satin finish. 4. For other installations. provide prime-coated steel access doors and frames for finish painting to he concealed hinges to metal frame, and with Allen key lock. pierced. performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications. 2.6 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACECONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install the gypsum wa~~hoard in accordance wlth the hwings and with the separate hoards in 2. At internal and external comers, conceal the cur edgrs of the hoards hy the overlappinE covered 3. Stagger the hoards sn that corners of any four hoards will nor meet at a common point except in moderate contact hut nnt forced m place. edges of the ahuttlng hods. vend corners. B. Ceilings: 1. Install the gypurn wallhoard tn ceilmgs with the long dimension of the wallhoard at right angles to 2. Wallboard may he InstalieJ wlrh the long dimenslon parallel to supporting memhers that are spaced the supporting memhers. 16 on centers when attachment memhers are prnvded at end joints. c. Walls: 1. Install the gypsum walihoard to studs at rlzht angles to the furrinz or framing members. 2. Make end joints, where requlred, over frdming or furring memhers D: Attaching: 1. Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the screws 300 mm (12") on center at ceilings and 400 mm (16) on centers at walls. GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM. CMWD 09260-3 2. Where framlng memhers are spaced 6LXl mm (24") apart on walk. space screws 300 mm (12") on centers. 3. Attach double lavers in accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer's recommendations as approved hy the Owner's Representative. 4. Attach to wood as required hy governmental agencies havlng jurisdiction. E. Access doors: 1. By careful coordination with the hawings and with the trades involved, install the specified access 2. Anchor firmly into position. and align properly to achieve an installation flush with the finished doors where required. surface. 3.3 IOINT TREATMENT A. General: 1. Inspect areas to he joint treated, verifying that the gypsum wallhoard fits snugly against supporting 2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will he performed. maintain a temperature framework. of not less than 12.8 degrees C (55 degrees F) for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment. and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. 4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly 3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. ventilated areas. B. Embedding compounds: 2. Spread the compound not less than 75 mm (3") wide at joints. center the reinforcing tape in the 1. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. joint, and embed the tape in the compound; then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. 3. After this treatment has drled, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 150 mm (6") wide at joints, and feather edged. 4. Sandpaper hetween coats as required. 5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. C. Finishing compounds: 1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of 2. Feather the finishing comp)und to not less than 300 mm (12") wide. 3. When thoroughly dry. sandpaper to ohtain a uniformly smmth surface, taking care to not scuff the finishing compound to joints and fastener heads. paper surface ofthe wallhod 3.4 CORNER TREATMENT A. Internal comers: Treat as specified for joints. except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner. B. External comers: I. Install the specified comer head, fittlnc neatly over the corner and securing with the same type 2. Space the fasteners approxmxately 150 mm (6) on centers, and drlve through the wallhoard into 3. Afrer the comer head has heen secured into position, treat the comer with joint compound and iasteners used for installing the waihard. the framing or furring memher. reinforcing tape as specified for Joints, feathering the jolnt compound out from 200 mm to 250 mm (8" to 10) on each side of the comer. 3.5 OTHER METAL TRIM GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM ~ CMWD 09260-4 A. General: 2. Carefully study the bawlngs and rhr installation, and provide all metal trim noma~~y 1. ne Jhawngs do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal mm. recommended by the manu6acrurt.r clf the Wsum wallhoard approved for use in thls Work 3.6 REQUIRED FINISHES A. Provide the levels of finish described helow at all gypsum hoard locations shown on the Drawings. B. Definitions of finish: 1. Finish shall be a 'Level 5' finish wlrh a light knr~k down texture. a. At all joints and Interior angles. applv tape embedded in joint compound. and apply three c. Leave surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges; h. Apply a thin skm coat of joint compound over the entire surface; separate coats oi jolnt compnund over all pnrs, angles. fastener heads, and accessories; 3.7 CLEANING UP A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessani care to prevent scattering gyDsum wallhoard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor sudaces. B. At completion of each sepnent of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris. and surplus material of th~s Section END OF SECTION GYPSUM WALLBOARDSYSTEM. CMWD 09260-5 SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide ceramlc tile where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installatmn. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Section 07920 - Sealants and calking 3. Section 071 10 - Membrane waterproofing Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 15 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. suhmir: 2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Samples of each type, class, and color of ceramic tile required. requirements; 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trdined and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specifled requirements and methods needed for proper perfnmance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with perrlnent prnvisions of Section 01614 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC TILE A. Provide ceramic tiles as shown on the drawinw and manufactured hy Ddl-Tiie, 7834 Hawn Freeway, Ddllaa, TX 75217 (800) 933-8453 from all availdhle cokn and textures frnm manufacturer or equal when approved in advance by the Owner's Representarive. B. Ceramic momr set floor tile - 4 %"x 4 %" unglazed porcelain ceramic tiles (ahrasives) as manufactured hy Dal Tile. Color to he selected from all available colon In both 'A' and 'R' groups and all prlce groups 1-6. C. Glazed ceramic thinset wall tile and coved base - 4 %"x4 %" and 2"x2" 'Bright and Matte' as manufactured hy Dal Tile. Color to he selected from all available colon from both 1 and 2 price groups. CERAMIC TILE. CMWD 093 10- 1 D. Accent hand on exterior elevation to he Dal Tile DH69- 'Denim'. Tile to he dazed and acceptable for use In exterior conditions as recommended hy tile manufacturer. E. Provide a thruhdy porcelaln tile with 0.5% or less ahsorption rate where called out for on drdwings. Tile to he installed with a full epoxy set method as recommended hy the Tile Council of Amerlcd. Provide tiles as manufactured hy Dal-Tile from all availahle colors and textures. F, Marhle thresholds. Double heveled in all available colors to he selected hy Owner's Representative. G. Provide standard accessory shapes as required 2.2 SETING MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America "Handhook for Ceramic Tile Installation." B. Organic adhesive: 1. Provide a prepared organic material, ready to use with no further addition of liquid or powder. which 2. Comply with ANSI A136.1, using type 1. cures or sets hy evaporation. 2.3 GROUT A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America "Handhook for Ceramic Tile Installation" in colors selected by the Owner's Representative from standard colors avdilahk irom the approved manufacturers. B. Mastic grout: 1. Provide a commercially prepared grouting composition designed to he used directly from the 2. Provide a product licensed by the Tile Council of America, and bearing that license symtxll. container. not requiring damp curing, and with high flexibility and stain resistance. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials. not specifically descrihed hur required for a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Exdmlne the areas and condirions under which work nfthis Section will he performed. Correct conditinns detrimental 111 timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condltlons are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Generdl: 1. Cnmply with ANSI A108.1, ANSI A108.2, and the "Handhook for Cerdmlc Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America. except as otherwise directed by the Owner's Represenrdtive or 2. Maintain mlnimum temperature hmits and installation practices recommended hy materials specified hereln. manufacturers. 3. Do not install tile floors over membrane until the membrane has been tested and accepted. 4. Walls (interior) - Thinser - TCA Method. W244-ZK (at cement hackerhoard). CERAMIC TILE. CMWD 09310-2 5. walls (exterior) -Cement mortar - TCA Method W231 -2K (expansion joints as required). 6. Floors - Mortar ser - TCA Method F121-2K (at concrete suh-floor). 8. Expansion joints - TCA Method EJ171-2K (mdndatoq' at exterior tile installations and as required 7. Base - Thlnset - TCA Method W244-2K (at cement hackerhoard). at Interior areas). B. Limits of tile: 1. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without 2. Terminate tile neatly at obsrmctions, edges. and corners, without disruption of pattern or pint interruptions. alignment. C. Joining pattern: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed hy the Owner's 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim, and walls are the same size. 3. Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area. 4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 5. Provide uniform joint widths. Representative. D. Provide expansion and control joints where shown on the Drawings, and where otherwise recommended hy the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, sealing in accordance with Section 07920 of these Specifications. E. Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section In accordance with 2. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous items from effects of acid cleaning. 3. Flush surfaces with clean water hefore and after cleaning. recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used. F. Provide rile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unhonded, and otherwise defective units. G. Provide required protection of tile sudaces to prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the Work hy the Owner. 3.3 SURPLUS MATERlAL A. Provide Owner with all surplus marerial, hoxed and raped and identified as to location installed. A minimum of one full hox of each type of rile and color shall he provided. 3.4 COMPLIANCE A. The Owner reserves the right tu request and pay for an inspection hy a representative of the Tile Council of Amerlca ro determine rhar the work of this Section has heen performed in accordance with the specified standards. B. In the event such Inspection determines thar the work of this Section does not comply with the specified requirements, immediately remove the non-complylnr items and unmediately replace them with items complying with the specified requirements. all at no additional cost to rhe Owner, and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the Inspections. END OF SECTION CERAMlC TILE ~ CMWD 09310-3 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide acoustical ceilings where shown on the Drawings. as specified herein. and as needed tor a complete and proper installatton. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufactureis specificattons and other data needed to prove compliance with the specifled 3. Shop Drawings in sufftctent derail to show suspensmn, layout, lateral restraint, installation, requirements; 4. Manufacturer's recommended Installation prmcedurrs which, when approved by the Owner's anchorage. and interface of the work of chis Sctcm with the work of adjacent wdes; Representative. udl hec~ne the hasls for acceptlnz or rejectmg actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers (rf skillell workmen thon~u~hhly tratned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar wtth the ,pec~fteil requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Sectton. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertment prcwt.rlon* ot Sectton 01614 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Deliver to the Ownrr for hts use In iuture m(dtf!sdttnns. an extra stnck of approximately 10% of each adequately protected aptnsr Jerer~<,rafl(~n. type of ac~~ustlcal marerlal lnsr;tlleJ, packaginc each type marerd separately. distinctly marked. and PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 "T GRID SYSTEM A. Provide a complete system ofsupporrlng memhers, anchor>. wall cornices, adapters for light fixtures and grilles, and accessones of every type required for a complete suspended "T grid system of the ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. CMWD 09510-1 arrangements shown on the Drawings. Provide color or colors selected hy the Owner's Representative from standard colors of the approved manufacturer, and complying with pertlnent requlremenrs of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and the governmental agencies having jurisdlction. B. Acceptable products: 1. Manufactured hy Armsrrong, P.O. Box 4455, Fullerton. CA 92634 (714)773-9101. a. Ceiling system to he 24"x24"~15/16" exposed 'T' grid system - color tn be white. h. Edge trim to he 15/16"~3/4"~3/4"~15/16" shadow molding model e7829 - color to he white. 2. Equal products of orher manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner's Representawe 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Acceptable products: 1. Manufactured by Armstrong. P. 0. Box 4455. Fullerton. California 92634 (714) 773-9101: 2. Equal products of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner's Represenratwe. a. Ceiling system : 'Dune' fine rexrured 24"x24"~5/8" angled regular. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required fm a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Except as modified hy requirements of governmenral agencies having jurisdiction, recommendations of the manufacturer as approved hy the Owner's Representative, or specific directions of the Owner's Representative, install in accordance wlth ASTM C636 and the pertinent UL design requirements. B. Lateral bracing: 1. Provlde lateral hraclng as required by pertinent codes and regulations. 2. Secure lateral hracing tn structural members. Securr at right angles to the direction of the partition and fnur ways In largr ceding arcas. C. Provide hold-down chps for ceilmg krards only when so required hy governmental agencles having lurisdlcrion. D. Make all krid level wirhln a tolerance (1font. in loo0 and straight within a tolerance of one in 1ooO. Grld to he hung utilizing a laser level. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS A. "T" grid system: hlstall acoustical ceillng hmards an linearlry of facing IS as directed by the Owner's Representative. 8. Sound walls: Set acoustical ceillng boards in four continuous heads of 6 mm (1/q) diameter sealant, one at top of each edge of the gypsum drywall and two on top of the top metal runner track. ACOUSTlCAL CEILINGS. CMWD 09510-2 3.4 CLEANING UP A. In addition to other stipulated requlrements for cleaning. completely remove finpr prlnts and traces of soil from the surfaces of grid and acoustical materials, uslng only those cleanlng materials recommended for the purpose hy the manufacturer of the marerral hemg cleaned. END OF SECTlON ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. CMWD 09510-3 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide resilient floorlng where shown on the Drawings, as specified herem, and as needed for a complete and proper installatmn. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions. Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specificatam. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within M) calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Samples of each item, color, and pattern available in the specified grades from the proposed 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; manufacturers. on the Work. Representative, will become the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly tramed and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and merhds needed for proper performance nf the work of this Section. B. Contractor to he a certified linoleum mechanlc and to present docurnentatmn of qualifications to the Owner's Representative. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provaams of Section @I614 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Dehver to the Owner for hls use in future mdificdt1ons an extra stock of approximately 10% of each separately. disrlnctly marked. and adequately protected aKainst dererioratmn. cokx and pattern in each material Instakd under thu Secrlon. pdckdglng vach type of materd PART'2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL RESILIENT FLOORING . CMWD 09650-1 A. Provide colors and patterns as selected hy the Owner's Representative from all available product lines in colors and patterns of the approved manufacturer in the specified type. B. Adhesives: 1. Provide wateqxoof and stahilized type adhesive as recommended hp the manufacturer of the 2. Asphalt emulsions and other non-waterproof adhesives will not he accepcdhle. material heing installed. C. Concrete slah primer: Provlde non-stainmg type as required and as recommended hp the manuiacturer of the material heing installed. 2.2 RESILIENT MATERIALS A. Reinforced vinyl tile (Rooms 108, 109, 110, 111 and 113 only): 1. Dimension: Provide 300 mm x 300 mm x 3 mm (12" x 12" x 1/8"). 2. Acceptable products: a. Armstrong Flooring - Standard Excelon (877) 276 . 7876; h. Azrock flooring and equal products of other manufacturers when approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative. 8. Sheet flooring (Room 112 only): 2. Acceptahle products: 1. Dimensions: Provide 1.83M x 27.4M x 2mm (6'4" x 90'4" x 0.08"). a. Annstrong Flooring - Medintech (877) 276-7876; h. Equal product of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner's Representative. C. Linoluem sheet flooring (Rooms 101 and 105 only) 1. Dimension: Provide 2m x 3mm (6'3' x 1/8"). 2. Static load limit: 450 pounds per square inch. 3. Construction: Constructed in 2 layers applied to the jute carrier. 4. Acceptable products: a. Forho Industries . Marmoleum Real (800) 342-0604. h. Equal product of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the Owner's Representative. C. Rubber hase: 1. Where shown on the hawings, provide topset hase as manufactured hy Johnsonice. Color to he selected hy the Owner's Reprrsentative from all available colors. 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide weld nxls at intersectlon of sheet flooring In colors selected hy the Owner's Representative from approved manuiacturer. Weld rds are to he provided hy same manufacturer as approved sheet flooring products. B. Provide other materials not sprciflcally descrlhed hur required for a complete and proper inst&tlon, as selected hy the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDlTlONS A. Examine the areas and conditlons under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions RESILIENT FLOORING ~ CMWD 09650-2 detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suhfloors: 1. Verify that substrate is smooth, level, at required finish elevation, and wlthout more than 3 mm in 3 2. Prior to laying materials, hrnnm clean or vacuum the surfaces to he covered, and Inspect the m (1/8" in lo"@") vartatlon from level or slopes shown on the Drawings. suhfloors. 8. Priming: 1. Apply concrete slah pruner if so recommended hy the resilient flmrlng manufacturer. 2. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's rec~~mmendat~ons as approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.3 1NSTALLATlON A. General: 1. Install materials only after finishing operations. including painting. have heen completed and after 2. Verify that moisture content of concrete slabs. huilding air temperature. and relative humidity are permanent heating system is operatmg. within the limits recommended hy the manufacturers of the materials used. Suhsnate to be tested in advance of work to he preformed. Contractor to take necessary measures to prep floor to meet 3. Maintam reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or plainly marked for future manufacturer's installation requlrements so as not to impede work schedule. cutting by repeatux on the finish surface as marked In the subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marklng devlce. B. Installing resilient tiles: 1. Place units with adheslve cement In stnct compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative. a. Butt units tightly to vertical surfaces, nosingb. edgings, and thresholds. h. Scribe as necessarv around ohstrucrans and tu produce neat joints. c. Place tiles rlghrlv lad. even. and In stralchr parallel Ilnes. d. Extend units lnrcl roe space*, deux revrals, And in closets and similar spaces. a. Adjust as necc>>xy ro awlid use of cut wldrhh less than 75 mm (3") wide at rnom perimeters. at opposite edges c~f the room are nf equal width. h. Lay units squm tc) axe.* (lithe rtxm 111 space. 2. Lay units from cenrer marks estahlished wlrh prlnclpid walls, discounting minor offsets. so that units 3. Match unlts tor c(11or and partern hy using mdtt.tlak trum cartnns In the same sequence as 4. Lay in ashlar pattern wlth Iran ~n all umth runnlnC the same direction. unless otherwise directed hy 5. Place resillrnt edge srrlph rightly burred t', unlrs and hecured wlth adhesive, providmg at all mdnU6dCIUred and pach~cd. the Owner's Reprerenrarlvc-. unprotected edges unlw crherwlse shcwn. C. Installing base: 2. Use iactory-prefc~rmcd uxrerlcIr corners. and tacn~rypreformed or joh-mitered Interior corners 1. Install hase where shown cm the LXawlnCb. D. Addit~nnal requirements tl~r In.rralllng ruhher fl<n,r~ng: 1. Install in strict accordance wlth the manutacturer's recommendata~ns as approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING RESILIENT FLOORING. CMWD 09650-3 A. Remove excess adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, usmg neutral cleaner recommended hy the manufacturer of the resilient materials. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING. CMWD 09650-4 SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide carpeting and carpet accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper glue down Installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, Generdl Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with peninent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings showing location of seams and locations and types of carpet metal and accessories. 4. Samples of the full range of COIMS and pattems of carpet and of exposed accessories available from 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; the proposed manufacturen in the specified qualities. on the Work. Representative, will become the hasls for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used C. After the Owner's Representatwe has selected the color and pattern, submit three Samples of each specified color and pattern from the stock proposed to he installed. Secure the Owner's Representatives approval of these Samples prlor to Installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thorourhly trained and experlenced in the necessary crafts and completely familrar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply wlth peninent pmvalons ofSection 01614 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Provide 'Falling Water' carpet tile as manufactured by Interface Flooring. 2859 Paces Few Road, Suite 2000. Atlanta, GA 30339 (770) 437.6800 or provide equal products of other manufacturers when approved In advance by the Owner's Representative. CARPETING ~ CMWD 09680-1 B. Provide carpeting wlth at least the following minlmum attributes: 1. TypeYam: 100% premise ecosystem SDN containlng post tndusrrral 2. Construction: Tufted Textured Lock 3. Soll/Stam Protection: Protekt with DuPont Duratech 4. Antlmicrohial Treatment: AATCC 138 Washed, AATCC 174 Parts 2 and 3. 5. Yam System: 100% Recycled Content DuPont Antrnn Lumena 6. Secondary Backing: GlassBac RE Tile 7. Yam Weight: 17.0 8. Machhe Gauge: 1/12 inch 9. Pile Height: ,1500 10. Stitches: 8.33 11. Pile Densiry: 6059 12. Total Weight: 142 13. Total Thickness: ,2750 14. Size: 19.69 inch 15. Radiant Panel: ASTM E-648 Class 1 16. Smoke Density: ASTM E - 662 17. Lightfasmess: AATCC 16.E 18. Static: AATCC - 134<3KV 19. Dimensional Stability: AACHEN Din 54318<.10% 20. Installation: Parquet (1/4 turn) 21. Carpt to meet ADA requirements for minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for accessible and/or post consumer recycled products 22. Warranty to include a 10 year colorfastness to light and edge ravel and deknitdtion. Carper to also routes. include a 5 year colorfastness to atmospheric contaminants. 2.2 OTHER MATERlALS A. Provide seam adhesive such as W. W. Henry Company No. 246, Roberts Company No. 41-0502. or an equal approved by the Owner's Representative and recommended for the purpose by the manutacturer of the proposed carpet. B. At intersection of carper and flcwr tile, prnvide Mercer Plastics Company. Inc.. "Custom Edge Carpet Bar No. 90." vlnyl, or equal, in color selected hy the Owner's Representative. C. Provide nther materials. including tackless strips. not specifically described but required for a complete and proper Installation. as selected hy the Contractor suhlect tn the approval of the Owner's Represenrdrive. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3. I SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Exdmtnr the arras and conrlirlons unJrr which work (rfthls Secrmn will he performeJ. Cwrect conditions Jetrlmenrdl ro tlmely and proper completton of the W(~rk. Lk> not proceed untll unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Make substrata level and free from irrepularltles. Assure one constant floor height after carpet is installed, filling low spots and pndlng hlgh spots as requlred. 3.3 INSTALLATION CARPETlNG ~ CMWD 09680-2 A. General: 1. Install the approved pad in snnct accordance with the manufxrurer's recommendatlons as approved 2. Scrihe the carpet accuratelv to vertlcal surfaces. by the Owner's Representarwe, llehrly huttlng the joints, and providing a smooth underlayment. 3. Align the llnes of carpet, as woven, usmg no fill snips less than 150 mm (6") wide, laying all carpet 4. Where carpeting is used on the walls. install as dlrected hy the manufacturer, and trlm the top edge in the same direction unless Specificdlly dlrected otherwise hy the Owner's Represenrative. and exposed vertical edges with a hrass cap approved hy the Owner's Represenratwe. B. Seam: 1. Locate seams only where shown on the approved Shop Drawings, or where speciflcally ntherwae 2. Locare seams to the maximum extent practicable out of the way of traffic. 3. Fabricate seams hy the compression method. using a hurt joint, and properly head and Seal. 4. Make seams as inconspicuous as possihle, flat, unpuckered, and completely free from glue on the exposed surfaces. 5. Do not stretch seams. approved hy the Owner's Representative. C. In addition to the cleaning requirements stated elsewhere, thoroughly clean carpet and adjacent surfaces prior to final acceptance of the carpeted areas by the Owner. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of traffic, maintaining intact until carpeted space is accepted by the Owner. 3.5 SURPLUS MATERIAL A. Provide a surplus of 10% of total installed carpet for Owner. Place in a hox and clearly label contents on the outised. END OF SECTION CARPETING. CMWD 09680-3 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Paint and finish exposed surfaces uslng thr comhmatlon of materlals llsted nn Paintlng Schedule In Part 3 of thb SectLon, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. The drawings do not purport to indicate all surtaces that are to he painted. All new surfaces will he panted wlth the materials specified hereunder in the numher of coats specified. All colors will he selected hy the Owner's Representative unless otherwise noted. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include. hut are not necessarily limited to, General 2. Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may he specified to he ktory-performed OI Provisions. Special Provisions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. installer-performed under pertinent other Sections. C. Work not included: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting IS not requlred on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessihle areas such as furred spaces. foundation spaces, utility tunnels. pipe spaces. and duct shafts. 2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum. stainless steel. chromium plate, copper, hronre. and similar finished materials w~ll not requlre paintmg under this Section except as may he so specified. 3. Do not paint moving parts ofoperatlng units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not paint over required lahels or equipment identiflcation, performance ratlng, name, or nomenclature places.. 5. Do not paint concrete that haa heen sandhlasted. D. Definitions: "Paint," as ud herem. means cmtinl: systems materials including primers, emulsions. epoxy. enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied material3 whether used as prime, intermediate. or finish ctyats. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent prtwlrlonb of Section @1300. B. Product dara: Withm 35 calcndar days aftrr the Contractor has recewed the Owner's Notice to Proceed, suhmlt: 2. Manu6dcturer's speclflcatltm. and other dara needed io prmw compliance wlth the specifled 1. Materrais list of items pr(yx4 to he provided under thla Section; requirements. C. Samples: Following the selecr~on tdcolorb and EIosses hy rhe Owner's Representative suhmit samples for the 1. Suhmittals: Owner's Representarlve'h rc'vwu. a. Provide three sample?, otcach color and cach &ss for each material on which the finish is h. Except as otherwlse dlrected by the Owner's Representative, make samples approximately 200 c. If 50 directed hy the Owner's Representative, suhmit samples during progress of the Work in specified tu he appllrd. mm x 250 mm (8" x Io") In sire. the form of actual appllcdtl(1n of the approved materials on actual surfaces to he painted. PAINTING . CMWD 09900-1 2. Revise and resubmit each sample as requested until the required gloss, color, and texture is achieved Such samples. when approved, will hecome standards of color and tmish for acceptlng or relectinE the work of this Section. 3. Do not commence finish paintmng until approved samples are on file at the work site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numben of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and work of this Section. completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the B. Paint coordination: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to he used and 3. Upon request. furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure 4. Provide harrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove the primer and re-prime as required. 5. Notify the Owner's Representative in writlng of anticipated problems in using the specified coating assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. that compatible prime coats are used. systems over prime-coatings supplied under other Sections. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to he painted and the surrounding amr temperatures are below 7.2 degrees C (45 degrees F). unless otherwise permitted hy the manufacturers' printed instructions as approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Weather conditions: 1. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 8596; or to damp or wet suriaces, unless otherwise pqrmitred by the manufacturers' printed mnstructions as approved by the Owner's Representatwe. specified hy the paint manufacturer as heing suitahle for use during application and drying periods. 2. Applications may he continued during inclement weather only within the temperature limits 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of the work of rhrs Section. deliver to the Owner an extra stock equaling 10%~ of each color. type, and gloss of parnt used In the Work. tightly sealing cach container, and clearly labeling with contents and location where used PART 1. PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MATERIALS A. Acceptable materials: 1. The Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section is had, in general, on products of Frazee Paint Company except for Ferrous Metals & Galvanized Metals - use materials in rahle helow as approved equal. manufactured hy TNEMEC Company, Inc. - Manhattan Beach CA Phone No. 31@.643.5191,01 2. Approved equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance hy the Owner's 3. Where products are proposed other than those specified by name and number in the Painting Representatwe may he suhstrtured in accordance with provisions ofthe Contract. PAINTING. CMWD 09900-2 painnng schedule compiled In the same format used for the Painting Schedule included In thts Schedule, provide under the product data submittal required hy Article 1.2 of this Section a neu Sectmn. 8. Undercoats and thmnners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced hv the same manufacturer as the finish coat. 2. Use only the thinners recommended hy the paint manufacturer. and use only to the recommended 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parrs ota unified system of limits. paint finish. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULES A. The Owner's Representative will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance In paintmg. B. The Owner's Representative may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the Work, suhject to the following: 1. Exterior work: A maximum of five different colors will be used, with variations for trim. dmrs, 2. Interior work: A maximum of 15 different pigmented colors will he used, with variations for trim 3. Dark tones: A maximum of ten dark tones will be used as accent colors for interior. miscellaneous work, and metal work. and wall surfaces and wainscots. 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint hy the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Owner's Representative. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to he applied, and that integrity of the finish will not he jeopardized hy use of the proposed equipment. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Prnvide nther materials, not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct condninns Iletrunmral tu tlmely and proper completion of the Work. &I nor proceed until unsatisfactnry condwlnns are corrected 3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers' rec~~mmendations as 2. When materials are not in use, store in rightly covered containers. 3. Maintain containen used in storage, mixing. and application of paint in a clean condition. free from approved hy the Owner's Represenrative. foreign materials and residue. B. Stirring: PAINTING. CMWD 09900-3 1. Stir materials hefore application, producing a mixture of uniform density. 2. Do not stir into the material anv film whlch may form on the surface, hut remove the film and. if necessary, strain the marerlal hefore using. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1. Perform preparation and cleanlng procedures in strict accordance with the pan manuidcturers' 2. Remove removable items whlch are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint hnish: or recommendations as approved hy the Owner's Representative. 3. Following completion of panting m each space or area, reinstall the removed Items hy using provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and paintlng operations. 4. Clean each surface to he painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment. workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades. 5. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxlclty and flash point in 6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces. B. preparation of wood surfaces: 2. Smooth finished wwd surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper. Where so required, use 1. Clean wood surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substance. varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and unmarred wd surface. 3. Unless specifically approved hy the Owner's Representative, do not proceed with painting of wncd surfaces until the moisture content of the wood is 12% or less as measured hy a moisture meter approved by the Owner's Representative. C. Preparation of metal surfaces: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease. 2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat the surface thoroughly 3. Allow to dry thoroughly hefnre application of paint. with phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution completely hefore proceeding. 3.4 PAINT APPLICATION A. General: 1. Touchup shop-applied prime cwars which have heen damaged, and touchup hare areas prior to start 2. Slightly vary the color of succeedlng cnats. of finish coats application. a. &I not apply addltwnal coats until the completed cox has heen Inspected and appmved. h. Only the tnspectell and approved COYdtS <I{ paint will he considered in JerermininC the numher 3. Sand and dust herween cmts to remove defects vlsihle to the unaided eye frnm a distance of five 4. On removahk panels and hln& panels, palnt the hack sides to match the exposed sides. of coats applied. feet. B. Dr).mg: 1. AILrw sufficient drying tlme hetween coats, modifying the period as recommended hy the material 2. Consider oil-hase and oleo-resinnus solvent-type paint as dry for re-cmating when the paint feels manufacturer to sur adverse weather cctnditlons. of another coat of paint does not cause liftlng or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. firm. does not deform or feel srlcky under moderate pressure ofthr thumh, and when the application C. Brush applications: 2. Cloudiness. spntting. holidays. laps. hrush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface 1. Brush out and work the hrush coats onto the surface in an even film. PAINTING. CMWD 09900-4 imperfections will not he acceprahle D. Spray appllcation: 1. Except as speciilcally otherwise approved hyrhe Owner's Representative. confine Sprdy application 3. Do not douhle hack wlth spray equipment to build up film thickness of two mars in me pass. 2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equlvalent of hrush cnats. to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand hrush wnrk would he inferior. E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture. color. and coverage. Remnve, refxnsh, <)I repaint work not in compllance with the specified requlrements. F. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed mechanical items: a. Finish elecrrlc panels, access doors. conduits. pipes, ducts. grilles, reFisters, vents, and items of h. Paint visible duct suriaces behind vents, registen. and grilles flat hlack. c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply two coats of alkyd enamel. a. Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has heen sized or primed under other c. Remove hand before painting. and replace after painting. h. Match color of adjacent surfaces. a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces; h. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamh seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the dmr similar nature to march the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed. 2. Exposed pipe and duct insulaarion: Sections; apply two coats on such surfaces when unprepared. 3. Hardware: 4. Wet areas: kame unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. a. In toilet rooms and conriguous areas. add an approved fungicide to paints. h. For oil hase paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol. c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate. 5. Interior: Use "stipple" finish where enamel is specified. 6. Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat-resistant paint approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Provide the fnllowing paint hnishes. B. Exterior metal. ferrous: 1. Fint coat: Serlrs 90-97 Tneme . Zinc @ 2.5-3.5 mils DFT . shop applied 2. Second coat: 3. Thlrd coat: Series 69 Epoxollne I1 @ 5-6 Mils DFT Scrles 75 Endura~Shicld -semi gloss @ 2.0-5.0 mils DFT c. Exterlor metal, galvanized: 1. Touch Up: 2. Second coat: 3. Third Coat: Srrles 90-97 Tnrme - Zinc @ 2.5-3.5 mils DFT Serles 69 Epoxolinr II @ 3-5 Mils DFT Sertes 75 Endura-Shlrld - srmi gloss @ 2.0-5.0 mils DFT L). Exterior wnnd: 1. Flrst coat: Frdree 372 W<d Undercndter 2. Second coat 3. Third coat: Frdzee 203 hrdtrc Frdzre 203 hrdrec E. Exterior concrete unlt mdSonIy: ' Refer to section 07175 Water repellant cmattngs. F. Exterior cement plaster and concrete: 1. Fint coat: Frazee 266 Epotilt PAINTING . CMWD 09900-5 2. Second coat: 3. Third coat: Frazee 203 Duratec Frazee 203 Duratec G. Interior eggshell enamel ("ESE): 1. On concrete, use: a. First coat: h. Second coat: 2. On gypsum drywall, use c. Third coat: a. First coat: h. Second coat: c. Third coat: a. First coat: h. Second coat: c. Third coat 3. On wood, use: H. Semi-gloss enamel ("SGE): 1. On metal use: a. First coat: c. Third coat: h. Second coat: a. First coat: b. Second coat: c. Third coat: 3. On gypsum board use: a. First coat: c. Third coat: h. Second coat: 2. On wood use: Frazee 065 Acry-Prime Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 061 Aqua Seal Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 367 Fraflo Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 022 Lo-Glo Frazee 661 metal prime Frazee 628 aro-plate sg Frazee 628 aro-plate sg Frazee 328 vel& Frazee 367 fraflo Frazee 328 velglo Frazee 328 velglo Frazee 061 aqua seal Frazee 328 velglo END OF SECTION PAINTING ~ CMWD 09900-6 SECTION 09972 PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide plastic coated wall panels where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needrd fnr a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affectinz work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provismns of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specificatinns and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation prncrdurrs which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; Representative. will hrcome the hasls for acceprinz or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. C. Accompanylng the product data. suhmlt 2@0 mm x 250 mm (8" x 10") or larger Samples of the full range of colors and patterns avaiiahk In the plast~c coated wall panrls, plus 300 mm (12") or longer Samples of colors and patterns availahk In rhe molJinEs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhera c~idalld ucrrltrnen thor<ruchly tralned and experlenced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar wlth thc qwcthed requwxnents and methods needed for proper performance nf the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANLl HAN1)LING A. Comply wlth pertinent provl*Itms of Sectwn 01614 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL PANELS A. Where "plastic coated panel; or "hlarllte" ia shown on the hawings, prnvide the appropriate follnwing components manufacrured hy rhc Marllre Company, or equals approved in advance hy the Owner's Representative: 1. "Hi-Gloss" panels, 3 mm (UP") thlck hy 1.2 m (4"O) wide; 2. "Trend" planks, 6 rnrn (1/4") rhlck hy 400 mrn (16) wide hy 2.4 m (8-0") long; 3. "Designer Colors," 6 mrn (1/4") thck hy 400 rnrn (16") wide hy 2.4 m (8'-0") long; PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS - CMWD 09972-1 4. 6 mm (1/4") alumilited or grained moldings to match the panels. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper installatlon, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's Representatwe. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditlons detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Securely install the approved products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative, setting all item straight, plumh. level, and true to the Imes and levels shown on the Drawings. B. Promptly upon completion of installation, clean all exposed surfaces with methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer of the panels. END OF SECTION PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS. CMWD 09972.2 Division 10 Specialties SECTION 10120 TACKBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide tackhoards where sh<lwn on the Drawings, as specified herein. and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Condltlons, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMIlTALS A. Comply with pertinent provislons of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. suhmit: 1. Materials list of Items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specificattons and other data needed to prove complrance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings in sufflclenr derad show fahrication, installation. anchorage. and interface of the 4. Manufacturer's recommended Installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; work of this Section wlth the work of adpcent trades; Representative. will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate nurnhers of sklllell workmen thoroughly tralned and experienced In the necessary crafts and completely familiar wlrh thc ~p~c~i~ed requlrements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of thls Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANL)LING A. Comply with pertinent prcwlrlcm\ <~iSecrlon 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TACKBOARDS A. Provide tackboard mdel 3 IOZEW L)es~ymer S~IIKS as shown <In the Drawings as manufactured hy Claridge Products and Equlpmenr. 601 Hlghway 62-65 Sub, Harrison, Arkansas 72602, (800) 426.4244 or equal producrs fr~n other rnanuldcturers when approvrl( In advance hy the Owner's Representative. Colors to be selected frtrrn rnanuiacrurers full color line avaiiahie. 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not spcciflcally descrihed hut requlred for a complete and proper installation, as TACKBOARDS . CMWD 10120-1 selected by the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions derrunental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfdctory conditions ate corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in srrict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Representative, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. Drawings, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved hy the Owner's END OF SECTION TACKBOARDS - CMWD 10120-2 SECTION 10165 LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide lammated plastic toilet partitions where shown on the Drawings. as specified herem. and as needed for a complete and proper mtallation. 8. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fahrication, installation. anchorage, and interface of the 4. Color and pattern charts showing colors and patterns availahle in the specified products from the 5. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; proposed manufacturer. on the Work. Representative. will hecome the bass for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requlrements and methnds needed for proper performance ofthe work of this Sectinn. 1.4 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with penment provisions nf Section 01614. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS A. Prnvide ihhrick Washroom Equipment Company type 1041.65 laminated plastic toilet partitions, flwr and arrangements shown on the Drawmgs. Colors and finishes to he selected hy Owner's Representative mounted, or other manufacturer approved in advance hy the Owner's Representatwe, In the dimensmns from all available colors and finishes from the approved manufacturer. 2.2 URINAL SCREENS LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS. CMWD 10165-1 A. Provlde Eiohrlck Washroom Equipment Companv type 1045 urinal screens in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the Drawings, or other manutacturer approved In advance hy the Owner’s Representatwe. Colors and finishes to be selected hy Owner’s Representative from all available colors and finishes from the approved manufacturer. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisiactory condltlons are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATlON A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in srrict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop recommended installation procedures as approved by the Owner’s Representative, anchoring all Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. and the manufacturer’s components firmly into position for long life under hard use. C. Adjust doors, except doors to handicapped compartments, to remain at a uniformly open position when unlocked. D. Touchup scratches and abrasions to he completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of 1.5 meter (five feet). END OF SECTION LAMINATED PLASTIC TOILET PARTlTlONS . CMWD 10165-2 SECTlON 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide identifying devices where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, bur not necessarily limited to: 2. Site slgnage; 1. Door signs; 3. Building signage; 4. Dedication plaque B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days afrer the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Details of installarmn and anchorage sufficient to enable proper interface ofthe work of this Section 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; with the work of other rrades. Representative. will become the hasls for acceptmg or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled wnrkmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely iamiiiar wlth the specified requlremenrs and methods needed fur proper perfnmdnce of the work of thls Section. B. Unless noted otherwise sl$qxage to he prnvided hy one manuiacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertlnent provisims of Sectlon 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Design IS based on use of standard products manufactured by Architectural Signing, Inc., 4082 Glencoe Avenue, Mama Del Rev, California 90261, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herem. IDENTIFYING DEVICES. CMWD 10400- 1 8. Provide the products upon which design is hased. or provide equal products of another manufacturer approved in advance hy the Owner’s Representative. c. Except as otherwise approved hy the Owner’s Representative. provide all products ofthis Section h.om a single manufacturer. 2.2 SITE SIGNAGE A. Provide AS1 serles 814-CTR exterior non-illuminated, one-sided center aluminum post fiheralass panel handicap and site signs with the following arnihures: 1. Sire: Snes as Indicated on the drawings. Thickness to he 1/8”. 3. Plaque color: To he selected by Owner’s Representative. 2. Type style: ‘Times Roman.’ 4. Type color: To he selected by Owner’s Representative. Handicap symbol to he blue; text to he 5. Frame finish: To be selected hy Owner’s Representative. 6. Margins: Centerlcenrer. 7. Mounting: Center mount; base mounting by direct embedment in concrete footings. 8. Messages: At handicap parking stall ‘Handicap Parking’ and ‘Van Accessihle’ and HC syrnhol per white. ADA requirements; at entrance sign per ADA requirements. Messages at non-ADA ydrklng stalls to he selected by Owner’s Representative. 2.3 DOOR SIGNS A. Provide AS1 series ‘SPE toilet rmm door (doors 2,3 and 7) sign plaques with the following attrihutes: 1. Size: 12” triangle and 12” circle complying with pertinent requirement of Title 24 of California 3. Plaque color: Blue. 2. Type style: ‘Times Roman.’ 4. Background color: Whlte. 5. Frame finish: To he selected by Owner’s Representative. 6. Marglns: Centerlcenter 7. Mounting: Screw mountlng - 60” high above finish floor. 9. Text: Provide raised letters and Braille text to meet ADA standards and any other ADA required 8. Messages: Menlwomen symhok. Administrative Code. %” thick. signs. Mount at +60” ahwe fmish floor to center of sign on latch side of door. B. Messages and graphics: Text and graphics tu he provided hy the Owner‘s Representative. 2.4 BUILDING SIGNAGE A. Provide AS1 series ‘LF‘ Ilghtweight non-illuminated fahricdted metal letters where shown on the Lhwlngs and with the following attrihutes: 2. Type style: ‘Times Roman.’ 1. Sire: 12” high x 3” thlck 4. Mountlng: Text to he mounted 3” off Cdce 06 wall. Mountlng installation to he per sign 3. Letter colors: Tu he selected hy Owner’s Representative. 5. Messages: CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT manufacturer. 2.5 DEDICATION PLAQUE A. Provide one ( 1 ) etched bronze dedicatlon plaque 18” wide x 24“ high at location shown on the Drawings. Text to be provided. Manufacturer requlred to provide camera ready artwork from rough graphics and text provided hy the Owner’s Representative. Owner to provide artwork prior to fabrication. IDENTIFYING DEVlCES . CMWD 10400-2 PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDlTlONS A. Examine the areas and condltions under which work nf this Section will he performed. Corrrcr conditions detrimental to tlmely and proper complerlcm of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisiastory cclnditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Sectton In strlct accordance wlrh the manufacturers' recommendations as approved hy the her's Rrpresenrdtivr, using only the approved mounting mater& and locatlnl: all components firmly Into posltlon, level and plumb. END OF SECTION IUENTIFYlNG DEVlCES - CMWD 10400-3 SECTJON 10501 WARDROBE LOCKERS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide wardrohe lockers where shown on the Drawincs, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sectlons in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specifled 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; Representative, will hecome the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of thls Section. 1.4 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WARDROBE LOCKERS A. Pnlvidt. the following products nf Lyon Metal Products, Inc.. 18955 East Railroad Street, Indusrry. Callfomia 91744 (213) 965-0680. or equal approved in advance hy the Owner's Represenrative. 1. Slnelr tier lockers. 3W mm (12") wide x 450 mm (18) deep x 900 mm (36) high. 3. Use all meral construction. and finish in colors selected hy the Owner's Representative from all 2. Provide standard top and hotrom louvered d(10r6. colun available from approved manufacturer. 4. Provde continuous sloping hood. end flushing panels, anchor angles and other anchoring devlces as and the manufacturer's standard key cahinet. needed, numher plates from 25 mm to 2 m ("1" to "EO"), built-in key locks with two keys per locker, WARDROBE LOCKERS. CMWD 10501-1 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described hut required for a complete and proper installation, as selected hy the Contractor suh~ect to the approval of the Owner's Represenrdtive. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct condirionc detrlmental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisiactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section where shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations as approved by the Owner's Representative, anchoring firmly into position for long life under hard use. B. Mount the key cabinet where shown on the Drawings, and deliver the keys to the Owner at the joh site. END OF SECTION WARDROBE LOCKERS ~ CMWD 10501-2 SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide fire extinguishers and cahinets where shown on the Drawmgs. as specified hereln, and as needed for a complete and proper Installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificatlons. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300, B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specifled 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 3. Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space requlred for these items. and their interface 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved hy the Owner's requirements; with the work of other trades. Representative. will become the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numhers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the speclfied requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply wlrh pertlnent provalons of Sectlon 01614. PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Fire extinguisher cahinet shall he model numhrr i338-BA as manufactured hy Potter-Rormer. Cerritos, CA (800) 366-FIRE. lnsrall the cahlners plumh and level where indicated on the Drawings, at helghts extinguisher installed inside. Locations, types and quantrties are to he determined hy local jurisdiction. acceptahle to the authority havlng lurisd~ct~on. Each cdhinet shall have a Potter-Roemer fire B.' Service, charge. and tag each fire extinguisher not mote than fw calendar days prior to the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work as that Date is established hy the Owner. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS, CMWD 10520-1 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfacn~ry condltlons are corrected. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision In the work of those trades for interface wlth the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the rnanukmurer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Owner. anchoring all components flrmly into position for long life under hard use. C. Locate bracket-mounted extinguishers where directed by the Owner and the Fire Department official. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS. CMWD 10520-2 SECTION 10800 TOILET RCWM ACCESSORIES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide toilet room accessories where lndlcated on the Drawings, as specified herein. and as needed for a complete and proper Installarlon. B. Related work: Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specificatam 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provlsions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, suhmlt: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Manufacturer's data clearly definiw the requlred support and other details of installation to enahie 4. Manufacturer's recommended 1nstsllanon procedures which, when approved by the Owner's requirements; proper interface with the work of other trades. on the Work. Representatwe, will hecome the hasis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used 5. All toilet rmm accessorm are to he provided by a single manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers ot skllld workmen thonrughly trained and experiencrd in the necessary crafts and completely iamiliar wlrh the spedlrJ requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply wlth pertrnent provlwm <If Sectlon 01614. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Provide toilet room accesxIru ar manufactured hy &>hrick Washroom Equipment Company as shown on the drawings or equal when ;#pprtwrd hg the Owner's Repre5entdrive. 2.2 MIRRORS A. Provide stalniess steel angle frame mlmors as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company in configurations shown In the drawing, or equal when approved hy the Owner's Representative. 2.3 OTHER MATERlALS TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES. CMWD 10800-1 A. Provide other materials, not specifically descrihed hut required for a complete and proper installation. as selected by the Contractor suhjecr to the approval of the Owner's Representativr. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed. Correct condttions detrmental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condirton?; are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into psition, level and plumb, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Proved solid hacking at accessible grah har locations. END OF SECTION TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES. CMWD 10800-2 Division 1 I Equipment SECTION 11 132 PROIECTION SCREENS PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide projection screens where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as nreded for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions. and Sections m Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMllTALS A. Comply with pertinent prnvisions of Section 01300 B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed. submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to he provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s sprciflcatlons and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show iahrication, installation, anchorage, and interfacr of the 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installatlon procedures which, when approved hy the Owner’s requirements; work of this Section wlth the work dadlacent trades; on the Work. Representative. will hrcome the haw for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers nfskilled winkmen thorouchly rralned and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely famillar wlth thc .*pucliled requrrements and methods needed for prnper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provalcm> td Srction 01614. B. Upon completion of the insdan<m. retain thc sw~tch key In a secure locati<m to prevent unauthorized operat~on of the scrren mnrnr. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECTION SCREENS A. Where indicated on the Lhawlncb. provide the ioliowmx prt~duct of Dallte Screen Co., Inc., 3100 North advance by the Owner’s RKprrsmtatlve. Detroit Street, P.0. &,x 137. Warsaw. Indrana 46581. (800) 622-3737, or equal when approved In 1. !Mite Dulux “del 8’ prqectlnn screen with the follnwing attributes: a. 5’-O”(H)x6’-8”(W), tenslimed manual celllng prqection screen. Shall have built-in tensioning arm PROJECTION SCREENS - CMWD 11 132-1 which locks in place, and shall he provided with one (1) set Model No. 6 extension mountlng hrackers and nylon hearings, screen fahric to he flame retardant and mildew resistant fiberglass with Matte Whlre plcrure surface with hlack mdskmg horders. Bottom of fahrlc shall he formed Into a pocket holdmng a 3/8" diameter meral rod. Case to he 22 gauge emhossed steel. hexqwn in shape with flat hack to prevent scraping fahric. Case end caps ro he heavy duty. allowing no exposed roller pms, powder coated. caps shall form sturdy brackets for ceiling insrallation. B. Provide other materials. not specifically described hut requlred for a complete and proper insrallation, as seieaed hy the Contractor suhject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will he performed Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper complerion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. 8. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings. pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Owner's Representative, anchorlng all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. C. Put each operating component through at least five complete operating cycles, and adjust as needed to achieve optimum operating status. END OF SECTION PROJECTION SCREENS. CMWD 11132-2 Division 12 Furnishings SECTION 12620 FURNITURE PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide furniture, as Specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper instdiarion, B. Related work: 1. IkKuments affecting work of this Section include, hut are not necessarily limlred 10, General Conditions, Supplementary Condirlons, and Sectlons in Division I of these Specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced m the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions ofSection 01614. B. Make specific arrangements with furniture suppliers ro provide clear plastic sheet full covering on each handling. item, and to provide heavy-Jury sh1pplnK crates as required for proper protectlon during shippmp and PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 FURNITURE A. Provide to Owner fully assemhieil, a rota1 of 5 aillusrdhir. swivel type fabric chairs with armrest. Chair hase IO he 5 point type wrh hmvy Jury rolllnp casrer*. GAI~ to he hlack. B. Provide to Owner a rofal of 20 w~re trame stackahit. ~(~nference room chairs. Provide color selection of chairs from manufacturers sranJarJ color line. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION A. Dellver the work of this Secrwn rtr rhe !oh site and srore where directed hy the Owner's Representative. B. When deslFated spaces are reaJy. a5 determined hy the Owner's Representative, carefully uncrate each item and place IC In 11s desxndreil Iocatwn. C. Upon completion of rhe insrallarl<m. touchup all scrarches and ahrasions IO he completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance <If 1.5 meters (f~ve feet) and tc, the approval of the Owner's Representative. D. Promptly remove from the ]oh sire all crates and other packing material derived from items furnished END OF SECTION FURNITURE. CMWD 12620-1 under this Section. Division 15 Mechanical SECTION 153m AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work included: Furnish labor, materials. and equipment required to complete installation ofautomarlc fire sprinkler system. Work shall mclude, hut shall not he hired to, rhe followlng principal rrems: 1. Design and preparation of sprinkler system plans. 2. Exterior and interior piping, including connecrion to water main and meter. 3. Detector check meters. vaults and hackflow preventers for new construction sprinkler sysrems. 4. Fire department pumper connecrion and test valves. 5. Post indicator valves. 6. Sprinkler heads. 7. Automatic sprinkler system. 8. Valves, hangers, supports, seismic bracing, sleeves and accessories required for a complete 9. Drain connections and piping for inspector test. 11. Cutting and patching as specified. 10. Excavation and backfill. 12. Testing and adjusring. installation. B. RELATED WORK 1. Section 15800 - Heating, ventilating and air conditioning 2. Section 16050 - Basic electrical materials and methods 1.2 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR A. The automatic fire sprinkler sysrem shall be instdled by qualified mechanics duly licensed and enraged In rhe installation of auromatic fire sprinkler equipment as listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or orher natimxaliy recognized resting lahoratories. 1.3 RULES, REGULATIONS AND SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Work shall comply with larest national fire codes of National Fire Prorectlon Asxlcidrion, Local Fire Marshal and Insurance undenvrtren. In addition rn NI~S and repu~atl(Ins enumerdteJ ahlwr. comply with requirements ofNarional Flre Protectam AsxKLatlnn Standard 13, and 24 and UBC 38 for fully calculated sprinklered huildinp. Unless otherwise nored, piping systems shall he deslped to providr calculated denslries as required hy hazard 8s future rrnant devekpnent wlth the Owner and Owner's Representative prlclr ro hld. indicated In NFPA. UBC or as requlrrd hy I<>cdI flre authorltles. Ccxmhate denslty requlremenrs for any rrqulred hy ahwe menrlonecl NI~S and regulatwm, prov1s1on5 of drawings or speclhcara1ns shall govern. Where drawlngs or specifications call for mater& or construction of a herter quality or larger size than shall suhmlr to rhe Owner's Represenrdtlve 6 sets of approved working drawings and 6 hmnd booklets As soon as possihle and withln 30 days after award of contract and before any purchase, the Contractor containing a complete llsr of marerials and equipment. Submirtals shall Include the followlng Item: 1. Plpe and fittings. 2. Valves. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ~ CMWD 15300-1 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. 8. 10. 12. 11. Controls. Sprinkler heads. Flre department connection. Alarm valve. Electrlc alarm gong. Flow switches. Detector checks. Dnuhle check hackflow preventer. Pipe supports Hydraulic calculations E. Shop drawinps of sprinkler plplng and hrad plans: Sprinkler system pbns and calcuhralns prepared hy Contractor shall he appmved hy rnsurance underwriter, and local fire marshal heiore suhmirtal to Owner's Representative. Drawings shall hear thr stamps otthese agencies. F. Contractor shall make arrangements with proper authorlties and pay required charges for installation of water service to and including meter drrecror check assernhly complete with servlce piplng stuh-our at valve pit, and extend service Into huildmR.. G. Upon completion of this system, contractor shall furnish Owner a certificate of approval from lepally constituted authorities havlng jurediction. 1.4 COORDINATION AND DRAWINGS A. Drawings: Prior to installatlnn of any work. the Contractnr shall carefully prepare complete working shop drawings of the entire auromatlc flre sprinkler system. The Contractor shall examme the archltectural, reflective ceiling, mechanlcal. plumhlng and electrical drawings for the construction of the huildlng In order to fully inform hlmselias tn the scope and detail of the work which will he required of him hefnre proceeding with the deslcn and prepararlon nf the final working drawings. The entire piping layour shall he designed to coordinate wlth nther trades tc) avwd conflicts. B. The Contractor shall carefullv cnordlnate the types and locations of post indicator valve. fire department connection, electric, alarm gmC. flow switches, mimlttmng requirements, drains, pressure tesr requirements, fire flow tests. ramper swltches and Insprcror's test valves with the Owner's Representative, prior to hid. local fire department. flre prrvenrhm hureau. lnaurance underwriters and the city huildlngdepartrnent C. The Cmtractor shall ccH)rJIn:Irc rhc routing <~t;lll ppng wlrh the structural drawmgs and all nther trades prior to any installatl<tn clr t,tbrlc;ltlc>n. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. The Cnntracror shall g~~aranr~ rhc atlrornatlc ftrc aprlnklcr system uncondita)nally fnr a perid ofl~ne year after final acceprancc. it durInL! rhlr perl'ki any rnarerlak, equlpmenr. or any parr of the system fails Owner. to tt~nct~on properly. the Gmracrgv >hall make g<~d rhc detects prnmprly wlthout any expense ttr the B. The Contracror shall he rcqxn1>lhlc ic>r all dam;w roan)- piirt ~~fthe premlses caused hy leaks In pipelines (11 equlprnent furnlsheJ anJ InmIId under rhl wctlon 01 rhe specif~cat~nns during construction and for a perloil dnne year atrer dare 01 ;Icccprtlnce of thl3 work. 1.6 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Contractor must trhtaln anJ pay all fees fix permlts. Ilcenses, inspections, etc. which are requlred hy any legally constituted authorlry. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. CMWD 15300-2 PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. ,411 materials and equipment shall he UL or FM approved and shall he of new stock. All marerials and equipment shall also he approved hy the local authorities. B. All equipment shall be new and the best of its class and kind, free from defects and imperfections. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Underground for sprinkler pipe service: AWWA CLass 300 ductile iron water main pipe and fittings. 1. The Contractor shall provide a 10' length of Class 300 ductile iron pipe with mechanical joint fittings at the point of entry into the building. Ductile iron pipe shall he used under the slah of the huilding. Coordinate with the soils engineer prior to bid. fire sprinkler work or as a parr of the plumbing work shall be the general Contractor's option and shall he determined before the hid is submitted. 2. Determination of whether fire service piping outside the building shall he installed as a part of the 3. N Victaulic couplings under ground/ 8. Interior sprinkler system: Am A-53 schedule 40 black steel pipe for 6" diameter and below, schedule 30 black steel pipe for 8" diameter and ahove. 1. As an alternate, an all welded system of "thinwall" steel pipe conforming to ASTM-A53 with weld-o-let type fittings may he submitted at the Contractor's option if approved by the local authorities. C. Vicraulic mechanical pipe couplings and fittings: Victaulic couplings and fittings may he used in lieu of welded or threaded connections where permitted by local codes. Couplings shall he Victaulic Style 77, with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal rubber per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall he oval neck nack head type with Specification QQ-1-666C, Grade II. Coupling gasket shall he Victaulic Grade "H molded synthetic hexagonal heavy nuts, per ASTM A183-60. Pipe fittings used with Victaulic pipe couplings shall he fahricated of malleahle iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-666c, Grade II. Where Victaulic ma~~eah~e fitting pattern is not availahk. fittings fabricated from schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fmngs with LTooved ends may he used. 1. Before assembly ofcouplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of Easkets with Victaulic lubricant to tacilitate installarmn. D. Drain piping shall he schedule 40, Ealvanized steel screwed pipe conforming to ASTM-A-53. with cast iron. dralnage pattern srandard welght screwed fttrlngs. 2.3 VALVES A. All valves shall he mmtmum 150 psi class and shall he UL and FM approved fix fire service and shall he approved hy the local authority having prlsdictlon. B. LXam valves in sprinkler control assemhly shall he prr>vdrd wlth sight glass and union. C. Shur-off valves inside huilding shall he rlslng stern type and shall he equipped with UL approved tamper swmhes. D. Check valves shall he UL and FM approved swing type. E. Alarm check valve shall be UL and FM approved, installed on riser, suitable for variahle pressure, complete with retard chamher. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. CMWD 15300-3 F. Water flour indicator shall he UL and FM approved, pneumatic retard feature to prevent transmtssion of false alarm upon llne pressure flucruatlons. shall he of the full paddle operated type. Auto Call model WF-4 or approved equal. 2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Standard, or approved equal, No. 5315 SQ with 5-SQBT My with clapper inlets. 4 x 2-liZ" x 2-lP exposed piping fire safety red. two-way, bronze. Hose thread inlets in accordance wlth local fire department's requirements. Paint all 2.5 POST INDICATOR VALVES A. Stochham no. 9156 or equal. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Drain valves, test valves, control valves, and alarm valves shall he fitted with approved brass or stainless steel stamped or engraved signs. Indicating their use. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Pressure gauges shall he installed as required by code, UL approved 4-llt" dial type. and shall have a maximum limn of twice normal pressure at point where installed. 2.8 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Sprinkler heads shall be UL approved for use intended. Reliable, Viking, or approved equal. of standard pendant, upright or sidewall types. 1. Warehouse Sprinkler Heads - ESFR sprinkler heads in warehouse, with regular sprinkler heads over automated shelving units - install hit Curtains around the perimeter of the automated shelving unit area. B. Location and finish 1. Pendent heads shall be installed in areas without suspended ceilings. Heads shall be bronze. 2. Sidewall heads shall be installed where required. 3. Recessed heads. Reliahle Model "G" or equal. shall he installed in all areas with flnlshed ceilings, PLACED IN THE GEOMETRIC CENTER OF THE TILE. Heads shall he chrome plated. ALL HEADS IN SUSPENDED SYSTEM TILES SHALL BE Representative prior to any Inslaliarion. 4. Types and locations of all items shall he coordlnared with and approved hy the Owner's c. Extra heads: Provide extra he& 12 of rich type, enckwd In suitahle receptacle, and one head wrench for each type. Receptacle shall he mounted where dlrected hy Owner. I). Guards shall hr provided where required hy ctdr. 2.9 WALL PLATES/ESCUTCHEONS A. Piares around plpes passing through walls, flcxrrs, and ceihngs shall he haton & CorhIn Manufacturing Company's "kacor" plate 13. Grlnnel, or approved equal, stamped steel split plates wlth set screw. Plates in flmshed areas shall he chrome-plated; other may he palnted or powered coated. 2.10 HANGERS AND INSERTS A. Hangers and supports shall he provided as required by code. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. CMWD 15300-4 B. C. D. 2.11 A. B. C. D. 2.12 A. B. Hanger shall he adjustahle split ring malleable iron twe with threaded steel hanger rods. Wall hrackets: Grinnel Flg. 194 and Fig. 202. lnserts shall he Grinnel Fig. 279 and Fig. 282. SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS Hangers for suspended equipment piping shall be sway hraced in two directions, per "Guidelines for Seismic Resrrdints of Mechanical Equipment" hy SMACNA. All prefabricated equlpment is to he designed and constructed in such a manner that all portwns, elements, sub-assemblies. and/or its attachments, will resist a horlzontal and vertical load equal ro the operating weights of those parts multiphed hy the following factors. CP VerudQ Rigid and rigidly supported piping or equipment 0.50 0.33 Load is to he applied at the center of gravity of the part and to he in any direction horizontally and vertically. Design stresses shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of Titles 17 and 24. California Administrative Code, and the 1994 edition of the California Building Code. Anchorage. support, andlor attachment of said prefahricated equipment to the structure shall he in accordance with "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Equipment" hy SMACNA. Submit shop drawings and calculations for seismic restraints and anchorage of the equipment to the Owner's Representative and Structural Engineer for review and approval. installation of equlpment or supporting elements shall not hegin until shop drawings are approved and signed hy the Owner's Representative and Structural Engineer. and approved hy the Local Fire Marshal. FLOW SWITCHES Flow switches shall he provided and installed hy this Contractor on the main fire riser for remote alarm connection. Make and mdel of all flow swlrches shall he as approved hy UL and the Local Fire Marshal. Coordinate with the Electrral/Alarm contractor nrior tu hld. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experlrnced Superintendent who shall he qualified in all phases of the work of thls Secrlon and who shall consrandy he in charge uf the work of thls Sectlon. rogether wlth all necessary mechanlcs and lahorrrs requlrrd ttr properly unload. transfer, erect, connect up, adjust. start. operate and test the ~nsrallat~m. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Underground piping shall he laid to hear on entire length. Elbows and bends shall he hraced or clamped and provided with concrete thrust hlocks in an acceptahle manner. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - CMWD 15300-5 B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1. K. L. M. Provide necessary clamps and rods for supporting sprinkler risers and underground piping, in strict accordance wlth requirements of NFPA Standard No. 13. Inspector's test pipe: As required hy code for each system, extended down rn glohe valve not more than 7'0 ahove flcor. Joints: Screw joints shall he made up with pipe paste applied to male threads only. Ream pipe as necessary to make hore at end plpe same diameter as within pipe. Reducers: Reductions in pipe sizes shall he made with one piece reducing fittlngs. Bushings will nor he acceptable. Run plpes in approximate IoCdtions shown and install sizes given on agency apprnved drawings. insrail pipe lines ahove ceilings with acoustical tile where indicated on drawqs. Offset piping wherever necessary to obtain headroom. In all cases install pipes to conform to actual building conditions, offsetting to clear StNctura~ members. Annular space at pipe penetrations through walls and floors shall not he more than 1/2". Exposed pipes, penetrating walls and ceilings shall he fitted with wall plates specified. Plates shall he secured in pos~rinn Wherever shown or required, anchor piping to building construction. Valves, unless specifically sized, shall he the same size as the pipe lines in which they are Installed. Install no valve with its stem pointing down. Install a union adjacent to and downstream from every screwed valve of any size. Do not permit any valve or other piece of equipment to supptr the weight of any pipe Keep pipe openings closed during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter Run piping true to line and grade. Finished work shall present a neat and workmanlike appearance. 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. This Contractor shall do all necessary rrenchmg. excavation. shoring, backfilling. and compactinn required for the proper laylng of p~pe lines. 1. Backfill shall he clean soil free from rocks and dehrls. Compact to 9096 of surround~ng soil. 3.4 INSPECTION A. The Contsdcror shall ntn alh~w In cause any of hlr wtrrk ro he covered up or closed in until IC has heen Inspected. tested and approved hy all authorltles havlnE ~ur~sd~ct~on. B. Should any of hls work he covered up or ~10st.J In hefclre such Inspection, he shall, at his own expense. uncover the work to the satlsfacrl<m of the Inspection parry. All related repair work cost shall he home hy the Contractor. 3.5 INTERRUFTION OF SERVICES A. Interruption of any exIstlnL: services shall he kept to a mmmmum. Shutdnwns shall he made nnly wlth his hld fnr this work. approval of and at tmes deslenated hy the Owner. The Cmtractor shall Include overtime work cost in 3.6 TEMPORARY SERVICES AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. CMWD 15300.6 A. provide tempordry services when any existing services are Interrupted in connection with work oi this Secrlon beyond the period of tlme acceprahle and approved hy the Owner. 3.7 CANNING OPENINGS AND HANGER INSERTS A. The Contractor is to make out. suhjecr to the approval of the Owner's Representarwe. the exact dimensions and positions of canning which may he required in floors, roofs. celllngs or walls tor the fitting of the piping. etc. the Contractor shall furnish plans and elevations, where necessary. showing the passage of piping, etc. The area of any opening is not to he larger than ahsolurely necessary fnr the proper snes and locations of all cans and required fmings through the huilding strucrure, and the locatlons and mes of all inserts for hanger rods, anchors and other suspenslon points. 3.8 PAINTING A. Sprinkler piping shall he provided in a clean condition ready for paint application. Cmrdinate exact requirement with the Owner's Representative prior to bid. Contractor shall identify piping (or conduit), machinery and equipment. 3.9SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls and floors. For concrete construction, sleeves shall he set in forms before concrere is poured. Provide 1" clearance berween sleeve and pipe. where installed in fire walk, caulk space between pipe and sleeve with fire rated material in accordance with UL and UBC. 1. In slah consrmction: Schedule 40 hlack steel pipe. Sleeves shall extend 2" above finished floor and upper surface to he sealed with mastic. 2. In concrete walls: Schedule 40 hlack steel pipe. When installed in outside walls, caulk space between pipe and sleeve with approved caulking material with outer SUrfdCe sealed to he watertight, 3. In heams: Schedule 40 hlack steel. Space between pipes and sleeve shall be packed with glass fiber. 4. Sleeves through waterproof membranes: Sleeves set in walls and slahs with waterprnnf memhrane may be either cast iron or steel, and shall he provided with a non-puncturing flashing clamp device and corrosion,resistant clamping bolts. Caulk space hetween pipe and sleeve with acceptdhle caulking material with outer surface sealed watertight. 3.10 TESTING A. Upon completion. Contractnr shall suhject system to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 pounds per square period, In any part nf system. Any detects due to materials or workmanship occurring durlng thls test inch, fnr a rwo hour continuous period. and nnt have mnre than two pounds pressure loss during this shall he mmediately correcred. All tesrlnK shall he prtwided as requlred hy NFPA, UBC and Local Fire Marshal. 3.1 I MAKING PIPE JOINTS A. Screwed pnts shall he made with American Standard pipe threads. Caulklng and use of rnpe or packing of any klng is prohihltrd. Ream hurrs formed hy curtlnC p~pe. Cut threads so that ax15 ofplpe and axis of 412 "Rlhhon U~pe" or John Crane Compan\,'s -Thread Tdpe". or equal, thread sealant. P~pes shall he thread5 are concentrlc. Ih] not use llquld p~pe dope. The only filler that may he used shall he Permacell free fr<m tool marks. B. Flanged joints shall he made wlth specihed flange holts. nuts, and gaskets. Flanges shall he allkmed so that no flange holt is suh~ecr to hendlng or shearing stress as a result of making up j(,mt. 3.12 PIPE WRAPPING A. Underground steel piping shall he protected with a factory applied polyethylene covenng. Field joints shall he field wrapped after resting wnh polyethylene sleeves that will shrink tightly to plpe when heated. AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - CMWD 15300-7